JP2015144968A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the deterioration of interest by performing a presentation corresponding to the taste of each player.SOLUTION: Operation frequency determination means 2666b determines the operation frequency of operation buttons 330 so as to perform setting by changeover between a presentation table that does not include a presentation pattern for performing a presentation corresponding to the operation of the operation buttons 330 in accordance with the operation frequency and a presentation table that includes a presentation pattern for performing a presentation corresponding to the operation of the operation buttons 330 in accordance with the operation frequency. Thus, control can be performed not to perform a presentation corresponding to the operation of the operation buttons 330 with respect to a player who does not want the operation of the operation buttons 330 while enabling the performance of a presentation corresponding to the operation of the operation buttons 330 with respect to a player who wants the operation of the operation buttons 330. Consequently, a presentation corresponding to the taste of a player can be performed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine in which a display device displays a plurality of symbol strings made up of numbers, symbols, etc., and the variation is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol based on a lottery result. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, the presence or absence of a big hit is displayed by a combination of symbols that stop on the active line.

  In such a gaming machine, there are many proposals that provide an operation button for receiving a player's operation and enhance the interest of the player by performing an effect display related to the operation of the operation button (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200207 A

  However, since the player's preference is each person, when such an effect is prepared and executed unilaterally, it cannot be a gaming machine that matches the player's preference. That is, even if the player who does not want to operate the operation button is requested to operate the operation button unilaterally, not only the player's interest can be improved, but there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in interest by executing an effect tailored to each player's preference. There is.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

In the first aspect of the invention, after the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit includes a display unit that executes a variable display of a plurality of types of symbol information based on the establishment of the start condition and derives and displays a predetermined display result.
A gaming machine that controls a profit granting state to give a predetermined profit to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means,
Game control means for controlling the gaming state according to the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling display of effect display means different from the display means based on a control signal output from the game control means;
An operation means provided so as to be operable by the player, and outputting an operation signal to the effect control means according to the operation,
The game control means includes
Display result determination means for determining whether the display result is the specific display result based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the determination result of the display result determination unit, a plurality of types of variation patterns including variation time information from when the display unit starts varying display of the plurality of types of symbol information until the display result is derived and displayed A variation pattern determining means for determining any one of the variation patterns of
When the display unit executes the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information and the display result determination unit determines that the specific display result is obtained, the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and not used as the specific display result when the variation time has elapsed, a non-specific display result that is different from the specific display result when the variation time has elapsed is displayed. Display control means for deriving and displaying;
When the display control means starts the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information, a control signal indicating the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination means and the determination result of the display result determination means is the effect control. Control signal output means for outputting to the means,
The production control means includes
Effect pattern storage means for storing a plurality of kinds of effect patterns corresponding to each of the plurality of types of variation patterns and indicating an effect mode displayed on the effect display means;
Based on the variation pattern specified by the control signal input from the control signal output means, one of the plurality of types of effect patterns is selected, and the control signal input from the control signal output means When a specific variation pattern of a plurality of types of variation patterns is designated, the operation request pattern for changing the effect mode of the effect display means according to the operation of the operation means and the operation of the operation means are irrelevant An effect pattern selecting means for selecting any one of a normal pattern for controlling the display of the effect mode determined in advance on the effect display means,
An effect display for notifying the effect result corresponding to the determination result of the display result determining means when the effect display means is controlled to display based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selecting means and the variation time has elapsed. Control means;
When the operation request pattern is selected by the effect pattern selection means, the display result determination means starts the display control of the effect display means by the effect display control means based on the operation request pattern. The number of operations of the operation means within a predetermined period is monitored until the presentation result corresponding to the above is notified, and whether or not the number of operations of the operation means in one variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. An operation frequency determination means for determining whether or not
The production pattern selection unit selects the operation request pattern at a rate higher than the normal pattern when the operation number determination unit determines that the operation number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the operation pattern determination unit selects the operation pattern When it is determined that the number of times is less than the predetermined number, the normal pattern is selected at a higher rate than the operation request pattern.
With this configuration, the operation frequency of the operation means within a predetermined period determined in advance is determined, and when it is determined that the operation frequency is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the operation means While selecting the operation request pattern for changing the display content of the effect display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means at a higher rate than the normal mode for displaying the effect form determined in advance regardless of the operation, the operation frequency is If it is determined that it is less than the predetermined value, the normal mode is selected at a higher rate than the operation request pattern, and the effect display unit is synchronized with the variation display of the plurality of types of symbol information executed by the display unit. Since display control is performed, it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation of the operation means in accordance with the preference of the player, and operation request patterns are frequently issued to players who do not want to operate the operation means. It is possible to avoid the dullness of the game by giving the hassle by the. In addition, since it is possible to execute an effect that matches the preference of the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.
In the invention of claim 2, the operation request pattern has a specific effect mode of the effect display means based on at least a predetermined number of times of operation of the operation means. It is a production pattern that can change to
The operation number determination means determines that the operation number of the operation means is greater than or equal to the predetermined number based on the operation of the operation means exceeding the half of the plurality of times.
Further, in the invention of claim 3, a game area formed on the front surface of the game board and into which a game ball is driven,
Launching means for driving a game ball toward the game area according to the player's operation;
A plurality of types of winning holes arranged in the gaming area,
The start condition is established when a game ball wins the start opening among the plurality of types of winning openings.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation of the operation means in accordance with the player's preference, and the operation request pattern is frequently issued to the player who does not want to operate the operation means. It is possible to avoid the game trap caused by giving a certain amount of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest and a decrease in operating rate of gaming machines.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a front view which shows a game board with a movable decoration body in a normal state. It is a front view which shows a game board in the state to which the movable decoration body moved. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. FIG. 75 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 74. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 81 from diagonally behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 84 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. (A) is a left side view of the center character, (B) is a front view of the center character, and (C) is a right side view of the center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally lower right. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left gate member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right gate member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member on the left side from diagonally behind. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view showing the gate member of FIG. 96 in an exploded manner. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side winning prize opening member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side winning prize opening member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side prize winning opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side winning prize opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into the light emission decoration body, the movable decoration body, the back box, etc., and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 105 from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from back diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the luminous decoration for every member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 110 from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center movable decoration body from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center movable decoration body from back diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation mechanism of the collar part in a center movable decoration body, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which shows the moving mechanism of a center movable decoration body, (B) is a left view which shows the rotation mechanism of a center movable decoration body. It is a side view explaining the movement of the collar part of a center movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the left side movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the side moving mechanism of a left side movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right side movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the side moving mechanism of a right side movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the under movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the under movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the under movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the under movement mechanism of an under movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box of the state which supported the liquid crystal display device etc. from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back box of (A) from diagonally behind. It is the rear view which looked at the back box of FIG. 127 from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back box of FIG. 127 for every main member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure around the main board | substrate in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a periphery control board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically arrangement | positioning of the movable decoration body in a normal game state, (a) is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of a movement of the movable decoration body in reach development effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the reach development effect different from FIG. 136 (A). FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the display mode of the door symbol in the reach development effect of FIG. 137, and the operation lottery probability. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the movable production | presentation by a movable ornament. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot game effect typically. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot game effect continued from FIG. 141. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the amount of appearance of the crocodile pattern in the reach development effect of FIG. 141, and hit | damage determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the haunt pattern of the first half in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the appearance pattern table selection table in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the haunt pattern selection table for the latter half in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various examples of the haunt pattern of the latter half in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various examples of the haunt pattern of the latter half following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the winning probability selection table of the operation lottery used at the time of the special effect specification in the reach development effect of FIG.

[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 so that a ball can be driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back side thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the present embodiment correspond to the horizontal frame of the present invention, and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 of the present example correspond to the vertical frame of the present invention. Yes.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the case of illustration. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main body frame 3 can be widened. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger. However, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recessed portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted. A recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Also, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it in one direction, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are engaged with each other. The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along one upper surface of the upper support plate 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26 is inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixed in a projecting manner. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A joint unit 480, a mounting base 280, and a frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is attached with the gaming board 4 having larger vertical and horizontal dimensions than conventional gaming windows 101, so the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, and glass is formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for attaching the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the impression that the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the lens cover 150 are balanced. It is attached to give The speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before describing the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 211 that is attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame main body 100 and the rear side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 that is attached along the back of the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal that is attached along the back of the lower side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the pivot support side with the security cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. In the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-crime projection piece 272 faces the lower rear side surface of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 274 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later, In addition to the crime prevention structure of the crime prevention cover 270, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from the lower side of the glass unit 250, the unauthorized access from the lower direction of the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the projection piece 272 and the unit frame 251. This prevents the post-crime protrusion 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 from overlapping, so that intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower direction of the rear face of the security cover 270 is prevented. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by the superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime projection piece 274. Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 223 and 225 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 213, intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5, rail security The concave and convex engagement between the groove 607 and the post-crime projecting piece 274 can further prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is formed in the lower part of the open side to which the ball feed unit 287 is attached. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286. The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocal movement difference of a ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electrical part or electrical part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle part 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 etc. incorporated in the board unit 1100 to which the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 It is connected to the main control board 1350 (see FIGS. 78 and 131) of the main control board box 624 attached to 1186 and the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340 so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) operation buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not possible even though the game is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns the micro switch off when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction by rotating this cam. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the sliding movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launching device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. (Corresponding to the payout unit of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 And various components such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. The main body frame 3 constructed by mounting the main body frame 500 on the main body frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before attaching the components. FIG. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 with the components attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional plan view of a pachinko gaming machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion). is there.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side. On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes the frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact. Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage 609 (see FIG. 30), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent. In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512 to play the game. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is provided with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. Further, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward above the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is protruded rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided. Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded. The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated. In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720. Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be attached. Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 if there is a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even in the case where a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  In addition, the 1st side wall 540 in this embodiment is corresponded to the front side wall of this invention, and the 2nd side wall of this example, the 3rd side wall, and the 4th side wall are the back side wall of this invention. It corresponds.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is provided at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top. When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. What is necessary is just to lift 740 upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guiding projection 561 is projected rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that its projecting height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the cover body contact groove 567 of the cover body contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 599, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. It is configured. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600, and the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the game panel 599. And the outer shape is formed in the shape of the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at a starting end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 with a foul. A mouth 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620. The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projection 275 of the security cover 270 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  By the way, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, a winning is obtained by aligning and guiding the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the gaming area 605 (for example, a winning opening such as a big winning opening device or a general winning opening) on the downstream side. A space forming cover body 621 (hereinafter referred to as a back box 2002) is attached, and a liquid crystal display device 640 serving as a display device disposed almost at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 621 (FIG. A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached as a display control board box in which a display device control board for controlling the display of the display control board is controlled.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back side of the game board 4 below the winning space forming cover body 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space portion (a width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is the width of the winning space forming cover body 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space forming cover body 621 in the front thereof. The drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later. In addition, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 provided in the board unit 1100 described later, a power supply board, and the like. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. The board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joining guide protrusion 628 that protrudes rearward so as to pass through the relay terminal plate 625 from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651, and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed. The slide guide hole 655 is used for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from the upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  Further, a hook portion is formed with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651 at a front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided to project, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. Balls flowing out from the supply port 288 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swing piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is protruded, and a motor contact protrusion 691 that is engaged with and disengaged from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is protruded on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally with an attaching portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attaching to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed. A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698. The reverse rotation prevention cam 698 is engaged with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. Prevents reverse rotation. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main configuration of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. 41, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted. Thus, the insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes inward from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface slightly toward the rear of the first inclined surface 715. A sandwiching piece 716 is formed and provided with a predetermined interval between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above has an elliptical shape formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 714 faces the connection opening 664, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although they are shown in contact with each other, in a normal state, they are in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 38A). 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanting cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the sliding protrusion 492 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked / separated with the opening / closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below. In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed on and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 28, the prize ball tank 720 is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543. Thus, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, and therefore the side wall 541 thereof. Although the depth of the storage part of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of ˜543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Since the entirety of 720 is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of a sphere at the discharge port portion between the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the outlets 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure. For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step. Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape. As shown in FIG. 46A, the front / rear bent passage portion 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body frame. 3 is positioned away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot support side rear wall 546 to the rear side, so that the winning ball guiding projections projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot support rear wall 546 are provided. 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending. Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped. A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, the ball path unit 770 is fixed to the pivot support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the pivot support side rear wall 546 as will be described later (FIG. 51 ( In the state shown in A), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit By connecting the 800 bent passages 803 with the passage wall 790, a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825; It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end. That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a bent passage wall 802 includes a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end. By forming, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed. In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball disconnection passage 880 to be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided. The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 822 slidably in the depth width direction. It corresponds to the lock elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed. Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are formed below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed. The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is provided above and below one side of the side. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the mating protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described below). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. And are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with a board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. . As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotational position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 monitors whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If an abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (mostly a ball-engaged state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball-engaged state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage. In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  In addition, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be. That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 58, the full unit is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 of the plate unit 300 described above. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engagement pieces that are engaged with unit engagement grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed while a projection 924 is provided. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the full tank unit placement portion 531 of the main body frame 3, so that the full tank device is attached to the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the formed dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. The mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG. 69) and at the lower end of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward ( In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. be able to. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on the side face 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 1008 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled in two places at the top and bottom, and screw stoppers 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are drilled. The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rods 1040 and the body frame sliding rods 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protruding piece 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling. Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. A clearance notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is passed through the rivet slot 1055, The rivet 1006 is in a state of passing through the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005. At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  With the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 is regulated. The state is in contact with the projecting piece 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. Therefore, the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from there is performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed. Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the substrate unit 1100 that is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in the figure, the frame unit is made of synthetic resin. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Attached.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side. A recess for a relay board for attaching the door relay board to the door is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the attachment hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Furthermore, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29). The downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 25, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. The box main body and the cover body are engaged with each other on one side, and are fixed to the other side by caulking with a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fixed with screws (not shown), whereby the main body frame 3 is secured by the cover body 1250. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

<Detailed configuration of game board>
A detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 82. FIG. 74 is a front view showing the game board with the movable decorative body in a normal state, and FIG. 75 is a front view showing the game board with the movable decorative body movable. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from an oblique rear, and FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 74, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 74, and FIG. 81 is an exploded front view for each main member constituting the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 81 viewed obliquely from behind.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 461 as a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 605 behind the front component member 601 A panel 599, a frame-like panel holder 600 that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 599 and holds the gaming panel 599 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 601; A rear unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect display means arranged on the rear side of the back unit 2000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a panel A board substrate holder 623 which is fixed to the rear side of the rudder 600 and covers the lower part of the back unit 200 and the liquid crystal display device 640, and the main control board box 624 is fixed to the rear side, and a symbol display device arranged on the front component 601. 1800.

  A game panel 599 in the game board 4 is arranged at the center of the game area 605 in the left-right direction below the center accessory 1400 and above the out port 606. An attacker unit 1500, a gate member 1600 that is disposed in the game area 605 on both the left and right sides of the center accessory 1400, and through which the game ball can pass, and substantially follows the outer periphery of the game area 605 on both the left and right sides of the attacker unit 1500. The side prize opening member 1700 arranged in this manner is supported on the front side.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 of the game board 4 has a warp inlet 1402 that allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter the left and right outer peripheral surfaces, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1402 to the inside of the frame. A warp passage 1404 for guiding, and a stage 1406 capable of being released into the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400 after rolling the game ball flowing through the warp passage 1404 in the left-right direction.

  Further, the attacker unit 1500 of the game board 4 includes a first start port 1502 that is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is opened upward to allow a game ball to be always won (received), and a first start port 1502 A second starting port 1506 that changes between a state in which a game ball can be won and a state in which it cannot be won by a pair of movable pieces 1504 that are disposed on the lower side and can be opened and closed, and a second starting port 1506 that is disposed below the second starting port 1506. A large winning opening 1510 is provided that changes between a state in which a game ball can be won and a state in which no winning can be achieved by opening and closing an opening / closing member 1508 that extends in the left-right direction from the start port 1506.

  Further, the side prize port member 1700 of the game board 4 has two general prize ports 1702, which are arranged at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and are opened upward so as to be able to always receive game balls. I have.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the symbol display device 1800 of the game board 4 is disposed outside the game area 605 and below the front component 601 on the right side of the out port 606. The first special symbol display 1802 variably displays the first special symbol when the game ball wins 1502 and the second special symbol variably displays when the game ball wins the second start port 1506. Two special symbol indicators 1804, a normal symbol indicator 1806 in which a variation display is started when a game ball passes through the gate member 1600, and a first special symbol indicator 1802 and a second special symbol indicator 1804 are variably displayed. The first special symbol memory number display 1808 for displaying the number of memory for which the start of the variable display is suspended when the game ball wins the first starting port 1502, and the first special symbol display device 1802 or the second A second special symbol memory number display 1810 for displaying the memory number for which the start of the variable display is suspended when the game ball wins the second starting port 1506 while the different symbol display 1804 is displaying the variable, and a normal symbol display When the game ball passes through the gate member 1600 during the variable display 1806, a normal symbol storage number display 1812 for displaying the number of stored suspended display of the variable display is provided.

  The first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804 of the symbol display device 1800 are each composed of a 7-segment LED, and the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506 are selected depending on the combination mode of each segment. It suggests a special lottery result by winning a prize (also called starting prize). Further, the normal symbol display 1806 is composed of LEDs that can emit light in two colors (red and green in this example), and the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate member 1600 is displayed. It is suggested by the emission color. When the game ball passes through the gate member 1600 and the normal symbol display 1806 emits light in a color (for example, green) that suggests hitting, the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second start port 1506 has a predetermined time (for example, , 0.5 seconds), and the game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The first special symbol memory number indicator 1808, the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, and the normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 are each composed of two LEDs, and combinations of lighting and blinking of each LED. Indicates the number of memories reserved (for example, a maximum of four).

  In addition, the symbol display device 1800 is based on start prizes to the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506 separately from the first special symbol memory number indicator 1808 and the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810. When the lottery special lottery result is a “big hit” in which the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the round indicator 1814 that displays the number of times the opening / closing member 1508 is opened and closed (round number), and the special lottery result Is further provided with a small hit indicator 1816 made up of one LED that is turned on when “low hit” (details will be described later). The round indicator 1814 is composed of three LEDs, and opens and closes the opening / closing member 1508 twice (2 rounds) depending on the position of the LED to be lit (2R big hit gaming state), and opens and closes the opening / closing member 1508 five times (5 It is possible to display either “Round)“ 5R jackpot gaming state ”or opening / closing member 1508 15 times (15 rounds)“ 15R jackpot gaming state ”.

  Although not shown, the game board 4 has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 599. The game panel 599 has a transparent plate shape so that the rear side of the game panel 599 can be visually recognized from the player side. The game panel 599 has a plurality of openings 599e (see FIG. 84, FIG. 85, etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a predetermined inner peripheral shape, and corresponding to these openings 599e, A center accessory 1400, an attacker unit 1500, a gate member 1600, and a side prize opening member 1700 are fixed to the game panel 599 from the front side.

  The back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 includes a back box 2002 that supports the liquid crystal display device 640 at a position away from the game panel 599 by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. In the housing space 2010 formed by the annular plate-shaped light emitting decorative body 2004 supported at the front end of the back box 2002 so as to be close to the rear surface of the game panel 599, the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the liquid crystal display device 640. A movable decorative body 2006 that is arranged and moves in the back box 2002 is provided. The light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 of the back unit 2000 are visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the game panel 599, the opening 599e, and the like. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a characteristic appearance not seen in the conventional pachinko machines in which the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 can be seen on the rear side of the game panel 599, that is, on the rear side of the game area 605. It has become different from other pachinko machines and can attract players' interest.

  Although the detailed configuration of the movable decorative body 2006 in the back unit 2000 will be described later, the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, is movable in the left-right direction, and strikes the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A center movable decorative body 2200 having a movable flange 2202, a side movable decorative body 2300 which is disposed on the left and right front surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 640 and is movable in the left and right directions, and a lower front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 And an under movable decorative body 2400 that can be moved up and down on the display screen. The side movable decorative body 2300 can be positioned in an approach position close to each other and a separation position separated from each other by moving in the left-right direction, and a game on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 The viewing range visible from the person side can be narrowed or widened, and the viewing range of the display screen can be widened by moving from the proximity position to the separation position (FIG. 74 and FIG. 75).

[Game panel holding structure on the game board]
A holding structure of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in the gaming board in a longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 84 is a front component member mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the panel, the panel holder, etc., exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 84 viewed from diagonally backward.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 599 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 599 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 600, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 600. It mainly includes a front structural member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600.

  As shown in the drawing, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 600, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 599 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 599 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The game panel 599 is thinner than the panel holder 600 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 599 has a plurality of fitting holes 599a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 599b extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 600. In addition, the game panel 599 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 599c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 599c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the board thickness of the game panel 599, and is disposed outside the game area 605 in the same manner as the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 599 to the panel holder 600.

  The game panel 599 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 599d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 599b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 599d.

  Further, the game panel 599 is provided with a plurality of openings 599e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 1400, an attacker unit 1500, a gate member 1600, a side prize port member 1700, and the like. In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel holder 600 in the gaming board 5 has a size that includes the gaming panel 599 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The panel holder 600 has a thickness of a member (for example, a gaming board base) made of wooden plywood in the gaming board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 600 includes a holding step portion 600a that holds the game panel 599 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 600a. It mainly includes a through-hole 600b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 600 a of the panel holder 600 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599, and the front surface of the game panel 599 held in the holding step portion 600 a is the front surface of the panel holder 600. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 600a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 599. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 599 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed (see FIG. 79). An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b formed in the game panel 599 held by the holding step portion 600a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 599a. A plurality of protruding pins 599c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 600c into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599, the panel holder 600 and the game panel 599 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with an engaging claw 600d and an engaging piece 600e that engage with the engaging step portion 599c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the engaging claw 600 d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 600 a of the panel holder 600 and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 599 c of the game panel 599. The holding step portion 600a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 599c. The engaging claw 600d has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 600. On the other hand, the engagement piece 600e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 600a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 599c of the panel 599 to be inserted is formed, the panel 599 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 600. By engaging the engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599 with the engagement claws 600d and the engagement piece 600e, the game panel 599 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 600.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a boss insertion hole 600f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component member 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 600f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 600 and the front structural member 601 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 has a mounting support portion 600g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this mounting support portion 600g, the rear surface of the panel holder 600 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2 in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 2018 (see FIG. 127A, etc.) of the back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 600g. 0.5 mm, and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By fixing and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 600g, the fixing portion 2018 can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 600, and the panel holder 600, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1 The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  In addition, the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 600g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back body 635. The storage recess 600h is further provided with a locking portion 600i that is disposed so as to penetrate the storage recess 600h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 202h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 600i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 600.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 has a plurality of mounting holes 600j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 600g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 600h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 600k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 600j. In the positioning hole 600k, a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 2022 formed on the fixing portion 2018 of the back box 2002) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 600j is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 600k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 600j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixed. 600j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 600 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 600l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 600 is reduced by the thinned portions 600l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 84, these thinning portions 600l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 600h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 600 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 600 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface thereof becomes a substantially flat surface, and the ball hitting device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 600 is formed with a thinned portion 600l so that the mounting holes 600j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 600. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 600 is formed with a positioning unit 600m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 599 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 600, an opening 600n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 600o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 so as to cover the thinned portion 600l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600 are arranged with each other. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. The positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, and a concave portion 635d for reducing the amount so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 600j and the positioning hole 600k in the panel holder 600. Similarly to the panel holder 600, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports or supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 600n of the panel holder 600, the communication hole 600o, and the boss insertion hole 600f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 600. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 600. By integrating the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 600j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 600b over substantially the entire circumference. A mounting hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 600k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes allows a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 599 in the present example, the game panel 599 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 from the front, and the engaging claw 600d and the engaging piece 600e, By engaging the engagement step portion 599c, the panel holder 600 can hold the game panel 599, and the front side of the game panel 599 and the panel holder 600 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 599 in the state where the game panel 599 is held in the panel holder 600 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting device, and to install the obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 599, the panel holder 600, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. are determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 599 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 600 and the front component 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 600, the front component 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the game panel 599 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be adapted to various types of machines by simply exchanging only.

  Further, since the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 600j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 600 can be shared by the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 600j. It can be made into parts.

[Board substrate holder]
A detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 86 and 87. FIG. 86 is a perspective view shown obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG.

  The board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600. As shown in FIG. 81, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and its bottom is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. Is inclined so as to become lower toward the front side, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599, it can be discharged downward from a substantially horizontal center. . On the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, a sealed part 1302 corresponding to the sealing part 624a provided on the main control board box 624 is formed of a metal plate fixed with a predetermined screw from the rear side. A caulking base member 1300 and a drawer holder 1350 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are fixed.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the board substrate holder 623 so that the caulking base member 1300 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the board board holder 623 and the sealing portion of the main control board box 624. 624a is sealed to the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark remains on the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300, and the main control board box 624 is illegally removed. Whether or not it has been confirmed can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in a state where the main control board box 624 is fixed to the board substrate holder 623, the heads of screws fixing the caulking base member 1300 to the board board holder 623 are connected to the caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624. The caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624 can be prevented from being removed. In addition, since the caulking base member 1300 is formed of a metal plate, the sealed portion 624a of the main control board box 624 can be firmly sealed by the sealed portion 1302, and a structure in which illegal acts are difficult to be performed. It has become.

[Center character]
A detailed configuration of the center accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. 88A is a left side view of the center accessory, FIG. 88B is a front view of the center accessory, and FIG. 88C is a right side view of the center accessory. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from behind.

  The center accessory 1400 includes a front annular portion 1400a that is in an annular shape substantially along the inner periphery of the largest opening 599e formed at the approximate center of the transparent gaming panel 599, and a front annular portion that contacts the front surface of the gaming panel 599. 1400a is mainly provided with an insertion annular portion 1400b having a stage 1406 extending from the inner peripheral end of the game panel 599 into the opening 599e of the game panel 599 and allowing the game ball to roll in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the inner lower portion. A movable decorative body 2006, a liquid crystal display device 640, and the like arranged on the rear side through the annular ring can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 has a left and right side and an upper side excluding the front side of the stage 1406 forward from the front surface of the game panel 599 by a predetermined amount (for example, within a range of 15 mm to 25 mm). It is formed in a protruding weir shape so that the game ball does not move from the outer peripheral side to the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 1400 beyond the front annular portion 1400a. The front annular portion 1400a has a warp inlet 1402 that is open to the outer peripheral surfaces on both the left and right sides and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1402 is placed in the center object 1400. A warp passage 1404 that leads to a stage 1406 formed on the peripheral side is provided. Note that reference numeral 1405 in FIG. 90 denotes a warp exit from which a game ball that has entered the warp passage 1404 comes out.

  In addition, the front annular portion 1400a is provided with a guide shelf 1408 that guides the game ball that has flowed down from the upper side of the game area 605 from the upper side on the upper surface side on the outer periphery. The guide shelf 1408 has an inclined surface that becomes lower as it moves away from the center in the left-right direction of the center accessory 1400, and the game balls that have flowed down from above the center accessory 1400 are on the left and right side surfaces of the center accessory 1400. Can be guided to.

  On the other hand, the insertion annular portion 1400b of the center accessory 1400 has a length in the front-rear direction (depth) that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599 except for the portion where the stage 1406 is formed (FIG. 78 to FIG. 78). See FIG. This prevents the center accessory 1400 from interfering with the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like of the back unit 2000 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599.

  The insertion annular portion 1400b is disposed between the warp outlet 1405 of the warp passage 1404 and the stage 1406, and the game ball supplied from the warp passage 1404 is guided to the stage 1406 in a ninety-fold shape. A nine-fold guideway 1410 is further provided. The ninety-nine folding guideway 1410 is formed in a plurality of steps (for example, five steps) stepped downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the stage 1406, and the inclination of each step with respect to the front-rear direction is alternated. The game balls supplied from the warp passage 1404 are sequentially sent to the lower stage while alternately rolling in the front-rear direction. With this ninety-nine fold guideway 1410, the speed of the game ball supplied from the warp passage 1404 can be reduced and supplied to the stage 1406, and the depth of the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410 can be reduced. Even if it is narrow, the game ball that has entered the warp passage 1404 can be prevented from being discharged from the stage 1406 into the game area 605 in a short time, and the rolling effect of the game ball can be enjoyed. .

  The stage 1406 of the center accessory 1400 is formed in a curved surface shape with the center in the left-right direction lowered as a whole. The stage 1406 is arranged on the rear side in the front-rear direction and is used for playing game balls supplied from the ninety-nine-fold guideway 1410. A first stage 1406a to be received and a second stage 1406b which is disposed on the front side of the first stage 1406a and has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is smoothly raised. In addition, the first stage 1406a and the second stage 1406b are formed with a curved concave groove 1412 that becomes lower on the front side and expands to the left and right as it goes to the front side. In the second stage 1406b, the second stage 1406b is arranged in two places with the center in between. Further, the second stage 1406b has an entrance 1414 that allows a game ball to enter the center.

  The front annular portion 1400a located on the front side of the stage 1406 is configured to extend upward so as to block the front end of the second stage 1406b except for the portion where the concave groove 1412 is formed. A discharge port 1416 that communicates with the entrance 1414 of the second stage 1406b is formed in the center. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the stage 1406 is discharged into the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400 from either the concave groove 1412 of the second stage 1406b or the discharge port 1416 of the front annular portion 1400a. It has come to be. Note that the discharge port 1416 of the center accessory 1400 is disposed immediately above the first start port 1502 in the attacker unit 1500 (see FIG. 74 and the like), and when the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 1416, The first start opening 1502 can be won with a high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 has a W-shape with a width in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine-fold guideway 1410, and the tip thereof is the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A transparent plate-like protective wall portion 1418 is provided. The central portion of the protective wall portion 1418 has an arch-shaped curved surface and includes an under movable decorative body 2400. Moreover, the upper part of the left side part and the right side part of the protective wall part 1418 inclines toward the center part. The protective wall portion 1418 can prevent the game ball from moving from the stage 1406 or the ninety nine folding guideway 1410 to the rear side of the center accessory 1400. In other words, the game ball can be prevented from entering the back box 2002 (accommodating space 2010) of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400.

  The center accessory 1400 of this example is provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface side excluding the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418. The end face of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 can be prevented from being visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated. Further, the front annular portion 1400a is decorated with a crocodile skin-like decoration so that the appearance characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a stage 1406, a ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and a protective wall portion 1418 formed of colorless and transparent members, through which the movable decorative body of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side. 2006 and the light-emitting decorative body 2004 can be visually recognized.

  It should be noted that the stage 1406 in the center bonus 1400 is higher than the level of the player's eyes when the player is seated on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 after the pachinko machine 1 is attached to an island facility such as a game hall. It is arranged at a position on the lower side, and it is easy to see the game balls on the stage 1406 and the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410 by setting the stage 1406 so that the player looks down.

[Attacker unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed obliquely from the upper right, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from obliquely the upper left. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the upper right side obliquely, and FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the lower right side obliquely.

  The attacker unit 1500 is inserted from the front side into an opening 599e formed on the lower side of the opening 599e into which the center accessory 1400 in the game panel 599 is inserted, and is sized to protrude rearward from the rear side of the game panel 599. Casing 1500a, and a flange portion 1500b extending from the front surface of the casing 1500a along the surface of the game panel 599 and abutting against the front peripheral edge portion of the opening 599e. The casing 1500a includes a start opening solenoid 1512 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 1504 for opening and closing the second start opening 1506, and an attacker solenoid 1514 for opening and closing an opening / closing member 1508 for closing the big prize opening 1510. The start opening solenoid 1512 and the attacker solenoid 1514 can open and close the pair of movable pieces 1504 and the opening / closing member 1508 by link mechanisms (not shown).

  Further, the casing 1500 a is provided with a second start port sensor 1516 for detecting a game ball won in the second start port 1506 and a count sensor 1518 for detecting a game ball won in the big winning port 1510. As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball which is won by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1516 is discharged downward from the discharge port 1520 formed on the lower surface of the casing 1500a. It has become. Also, the game ball detected by the count sensor 1518 after winning the big prize opening 1510 is discharged downward from a position different from the outlet 1520 on the lower surface of the casing 1500a.

  As shown in the figure, a first start port 1502 and a second start port 1506 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 1500b of the attacker unit 1500 so as to protrude forward. In addition, a guide rod 1522 integrally formed with the flange portion 1500b extends rearward from the first start port 1502. Further, the flange portion 1500b is rotatably supported with the lower side of the opening / closing member 1508 extending in the left-right direction as an axis, and is closed when the upper side of the opening / closing member 1508 is moved forward by the opening drive of the attacker solenoid 1514. The large prize winning opening 1510 is opened.

  The flange portion 1500b has a plurality of through-holes 1524 penetrating therethrough, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the front surface of the game panel 599 through the attachment holes 1524, whereby the attacker unit 1500 is attached to the game panel 599. It can be attached and fixed to. 93 and 94, reference numeral 1526 denotes a protrusion for positioning the fixed position of the attacker unit 1500 with respect to the game panel 599. The protrusion 1526 is located at the position of the game panel 599 corresponding to the protrusion 1526. A positioning hole to be inserted is formed (not shown).

  The attacker unit 1500 has a crocodile-like decoration on the surface and a plated layer having a metallic luster as with the center accessory 1400, and this pachinko machine 1 is characterized. Yes.

[Gate material]
The structure of the gate member 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95A is a perspective view of the left gate member as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 95B is a perspective view of the right gate member as viewed from the oblique front. 96 is a perspective view of the left gate member as viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view showing the gate member of FIG. 96 in an exploded manner.

  The gate member 1600 of this example is disposed in the game area 605 and extends in the horizontal direction from the rear end of the gate part 1602 and the square hole-shaped gate part 1602 penetrating in the vertical direction and allowing the game ball to pass therethrough. A flange portion 1604 that comes into contact with the front surface of the outgoing game panel 599 and an insertion portion 1606 that extends backward from the rear end of the gate portion 1602 and is inserted into an opening 599e formed in the game panel 599 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the gate portion 1602 and the insertion portion 1606 in the gate member 1600 have substantially the same width in the left-right direction and height in the up-down direction. In addition, the gate member 1600 has through holes 1608 that penetrate the insertion portion 1606 in the front-rear direction, and grooves 1610 that are continuous with the through holes 1608 of the insertion portion 1606 are formed on the inner sides of the left and right sides of the gate portion 1602. Formed (see FIG. 97).

  In the gate member 1600 of this example, the left gate member 1600 is provided with a gate sensor 1612 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 1602. The gate sensor 1612 is supported by the gate member 1600 by being fitted into the through hole 1608 of the insertion portion 1606 and the groove 1610 of the gate portion 1602. In the state where the gate sensor 1612 is supported by the gate member 1600, a predetermined small screw such as a pan screw is screwed into the screw hole 1614 formed in the rear end of the insertion portion 1606, so that the head of the small screw Movement to the rear side is restricted, and the gate sensor 1612 can be fixed to the gate member 1600.

  Note that the gate member 1600 of this example is such that the length of the insertion portion 1606 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599. It does not protrude greatly to the rear side, and does not interfere with the light emitting decorative body 2004 or the like of the back unit 2000 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599.

  Reference numeral 1616 in the figure denotes an attachment hole into which a screw for attaching the gate member 1600 to the front surface of the game panel 599 can be inserted. Reference numeral 1618 in the figure denotes a protrusion for positioning the gate member 1600 at a predetermined position of the game panel 599. By inserting the gate member 1600 into a positioning hole formed at a predetermined position of the game panel 599, the gate member 1600 is predetermined. It can be positioned at a position.

  The gate member 1600 is also provided with a crocodile-like decoration on the surface and a plated layer having a metallic luster, as in the case of the center accessory 1400 and the attacker unit 1500. The machine 1 is characterized.

[Side prize opening member]
The configuration of the side prize opening member 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 (A) is a perspective view of the left side winning prize opening member as viewed from diagonally forward, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) as viewed from diagonally rear. FIG. 99 (A) is a perspective view of the right side winning prize opening member as viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) as viewed from the oblique rear. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the left side winning prize port member disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the right side winning prize port member disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward.

  The side prize-winning member 1700 of this example includes a transparent and plate-like base member 1704 extending in an arc shape, a front upper member 1706 that is fixed to the upper front side of the base member 1704 and has an upper general prize-winning port 1702 formed thereon, A front lower member 1708 fixed to the front lower portion of the member 1704 and having a lower general winning opening 1702 formed therein. In the side prize opening member 1700, a front upper member 1706 and a front lower member 1708 are assembled to a base member 1704 with screws penetrating the base member 1704 from the rear side.

  The base member 1704 of the side prize opening member 1700 includes an insertion base portion 1710 that is inserted into the opening 599e of the game panel 599, and an exposed portion 1712 that protrudes forward from the insertion base portion 1710 and is exposed to the player side. Although not shown, a plurality of minute lenses are formed in the exposed portion 1712 so that light passing through the exposed portion 1712 can be diffused. Note that the dimension of the insertion base portion 1710 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599, and does not protrude from the rear surface of the game panel 599.

  The front upper member 1706 is inserted into the opening 599e of the game panel 599 together with the insertion base portion 1710 of the base member 1704, and can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 599 provided at the front end of the insertion portion 1714. And a general winning opening 1702 is formed so as to extend forward from the flange portion 1716. Further, the front upper member 1706 further includes a guide shelf 1718 that extends forward from the flange portion 1716 and is inclined on the upper surface so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605. The game balls that have flowed down in the game area 605 by the guide shelf 1718 can be guided to the center side of the game area 605. Further, on the front upper member 1706, a game ball won in the general prize opening 1702 with a length projecting rearward from the rear face of the game panel 599 to the rear side of the general prize opening 1702 to the rear side of the game panel 599. A guiding rod 1720 for guiding is provided.

  On the other hand, the front lower member 1708 includes a flange portion 1722 that extends substantially along the front surface of the game panel 599, and a general winning opening 1702 is formed so as to extend forward from the flange portion 1722. In addition, on the rear side of the general winning opening 1702 in the front lower member 1708, the game ball won in the general winning opening 1702 with a length protruding rearward from the rear surface of the gaming panel 599 is guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 599. A guide rod 1724 is provided.

  The front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708 have flanges 1716 and 1722 formed with attachment holes 1726 for attaching the side prize port member 1700 to the front surface of the game panel 599. The side winning opening member 1700 can be fixed by screwing it into the game panel 599 through the mounting hole 1726. Further, the flange portions 1716 and 1722 of the front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708 are formed with protrusions 1728 that protrude rearward, and the protrusions 1728 are inserted into predetermined positions of the game panel 599. The side winning opening member 1700 can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  The side prize opening member 1700 has a crocodile skin decoration on the surface of the front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708, and a plated layer having a metallic luster is formed. Similar to the attacker unit 1500 and the like, the pachinko machine 1 is characterized.

≪Back unit≫
The configuration of the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view of the back unit, FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique back. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit broken down into a light emitting decorative body, a movable decorative body, a back box, etc. and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 105 viewed from diagonally backward. is there.

  The back unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment supports the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side, and an opening 2012 that is closed from the rear side by the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear wall 2014. A box-like back box 2002 that is formed and attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and whose front side is opened; a plate-like light-emitting decorative body 2004 that is arranged and fixed at the front end of the back box 2002; A movable decorative body 2006 is provided that is disposed in an accommodation space 2010 formed between the body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 and is movable in a predetermined direction.

  In this back unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640, a light emitting decoration body 2004, and a movable decoration body 2006 are unitized by a back box 2002, and the game can be achieved by simply attaching and fixing the back box 2002 to the rear side of the panel holder 600. The liquid crystal display device 640 and the like can be easily fixed to the rear side of the panel 599, and the movable decoration body 2006 and the liquid crystal display device 640 and the like arranged on the rear side through the ring of the light emitting decoration body 2004 are provided from the player side. It can be visually recognized.

  As will be described in detail later, the back unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 2120 in the light emitting decoration body 2004 so that various light emission effects can be performed according to the gaming state. The movable decorative body 2006 includes a center movable decorative body 2200 disposed on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, a side movable decorative body 2300 disposed on the left and right front surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the liquid crystal display device 640. An under movable decorative body 2400 disposed on the lower front surface is provided, and each movable decorative body 2006 is movable in a predetermined direction in accordance with a game state so that various movable effects can be performed. Further, the back box 2002 includes various board boxes in which a control board for controlling a light emission effect and a movable effect is accommodated in addition to the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side, and a relay board for connecting and relaying the boards. Etc. are fixed.

[Luminous decoration]
A detailed configuration of the light emitting decorative body 2002 in the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body as viewed obliquely from the upper front, FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body as viewed obliquely from the upper rear, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 110 viewed from the oblique rear.

  The light emitting decorative body 2002 in the back unit 2000 of this example includes an annular plate-shaped decorative member 2100, a transparent plate-shaped diffusing lens member 2110 disposed on the rear side of the decorative member 2100, and a rear side of the diffusing lens member 2110. A light emitting decorative substrate 2130 having a plurality of LEDs 2120 mounted thereon and a light emitting decorative base member disposed on the rear side of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 and supporting at least the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, and the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 2140.

  As shown in the drawing, the decorative member 2100 of the light-emitting decorative body 2002 has an outer shape whose outer shape is substantially in line with the outer peripheral shape of the game area 605 and an inner shape that is substantially circular with the inner shape of the center accessory 1400 in the front view. A plurality of openings 2101 extending in the front-rear direction and formed in the circumferential direction are provided radially extending about the approximate center of the region 605. The decorative member 2100 is composed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is formed of a semicircular arc-shaped upper divided body 2102 that forms the upper half, and a quadrant that forms the outer periphery of the lower half of the decorative member 2100 that continues from the upper divided body 2102. An arc-shaped left lower divided body 2103L and a right lower divided body 2103R; a left arc divided left inner divided body 2104L and a right inner divided body 2104R disposed on the inner peripheral side of the left lower divided body 2103L and the right lower divided body 2103R; It consists of

  The left lower divided body 2103L and the right lower divided body 2103R are formed with through holes 2105 through which guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 to the rear side can be inserted. That is, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 1702 is guided to the rear side of the decorative member 2100. In addition, an opening portion of the game panel 599 is provided at an end portion on the center side with respect to the left-right direction of the game area 605 of the lower left divided body 2103L and the lower right divided body 2103R, and the left inner divided body 2104L and the right inner divided body 2104R. A notch 2106 is formed to avoid contact with the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 that protrudes to the rear side of the gaming panel 599 through the 599e. The notch 2106 allows the casing 1500 a of the attacker unit 1500 to extend to the rear side of the decorative member 2100.

  Further, the upper divided body 2102 of the decorative member 2100 is provided with a plurality of fixing portions 2107 extending radially outward from the outer periphery thereof with the center of the game area 605 as the center. The upper divided body 2102 can be fixed to the light emitting decoration base member 2140 and the back box 2002 via the fixing portion 2107.

  Note that the left inner divided body 2104L and the right inner divided body 2104R in the decorative member 2100 are disposed at positions slightly rearward compared to the upper divided body 2102, the left lower divided body 2103L, and the right lower divided body 2103R. The three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the plate-shaped decorative member 2100 as much as possible. In addition, the decorative member 2100 has a surface that is shaped like a rock and is formed with a plating layer having a metallic luster.

  The diffusing lens member 2110 of the light emitting decorative body 2004 has a plate shape with a size and shape substantially corresponding to the decorative member 2100, and is substantially the same size as the upper divided body 2102 of the decorative member 2100 and is located on the rear side of the upper divided body 2102. The lower lens unit 2111, the lower left divided body 2103L, and the lower inner divided body 2104L are arranged on the rear side of the lower left divided body 2103L and the left inner divided body 2104L in the same size as the combined size of the left lower divided body 2103L and the left inner divided body 2104L A lower right lens member disposed on the rear side of the lower right divided body 2103R and the right inner divided body 2104R and having the same size as the left lens member 2112L, the right lower divided body 2103R, and the right inner divided body 2104R. 2112R.

  The diffusing lens member 2110 includes a lens portion 2113 that extends radially from the center of the game area 605 in the front and includes a plurality of small-diameter lenses arranged in the circumferential direction. The lens portion 2113 is arranged and formed so as to correspond to the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100. In the assembled state, only the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 passes through the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100. To be exposed. Further, the lens portion 2113 diffuses light emitted from the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration board 2130 disposed on the rear side widely to the player side, so that even with a small number of LEDs 2120 (LEDs 2120 that emit point light). The opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 can emit light in a planar shape.

  Similarly to the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110 is formed with a through hole 2114 through which guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 can be inserted.

  The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 of the light emitting decorative body 2004 is disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 2110, and a plurality of LEDs 2120 are mounted on the surface thereof. The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 includes an upper left substrate 2131L disposed on the rear side of the left half of the upper lens member 2111, and an upper portion disposed adjacent to the upper left substrate and on the rear side of the right half of the upper lens member 2111. The right substrate 2131R, the left lower substrate 2132L disposed at a position corresponding to the left lower divided body 2103L on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L, and the right lower divided body 2103R corresponding to the rear side of the lower right lens member 2112R. A right lower substrate 2132R disposed at a position, a left inner upper substrate 2133L disposed at a position corresponding to the upper half of the left inner divided body 2104L on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L, and a rear of the lower right lens member 2112R. The right inner upper substrate 2133R disposed at a position corresponding to the upper half of the right inner divided body 2104R on the side, and the lower left lens member 2112 The left inner lower substrate 2134L is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower half of the left inner divided body 2104L on the rear side, and is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower half of the right inner divided body 2104R on the rear side of the lower right lens member 2112R. And a right inner lower substrate 2134R.

  The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 has LEDs 2120 mounted on the surface corresponding to the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 disposed on the front side, and one lens portion 2113 has a size corresponding to the size of the lens portion 2113. On the other hand, one or a plurality of LEDs 2120 are provided. Specifically, as shown in the drawing, the LED 2120 disposed on the rear side of the lens portion 2113 having a long extension with respect to the lens portion 2113 extending radially about the substantially center of the game area 605 in front view is a lens. A plurality of rows are provided in substantially the same direction as the direction in which the portion 2113 extends. That is, a plurality of LEDs 2120 are arranged in a radial pattern.

  Note that the front side of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is painted white so that the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is not conspicuous, and the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 can emit light more planarly. In addition, the LED 2120 mounted on the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 can emit light in various colors, and can perform various light emission effects depending on the light emission color as well as lighting and blinking.

  The light emitting decoration base member 2140 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 has a rectangular outer shape and a circular inner shape, and is entirely formed in a frame shape with an open upper side. And a right base member 2140R. The light emitting decorative base member 2140 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes and mounting bosses at predetermined positions for fixing the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, the light emitting decorative substrate 2130, and the like.

  Similarly to the decorative member 2100 and the diffusing lens member 2110, the light emitting decorative base member 2140 is formed with a through hole 2141 through which the guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 can be inserted. In addition, a notch 2142 is formed to avoid contact with the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 that protrudes to the rear side of the gaming panel 599 through the opening 599e of the gaming panel 599. The through holes 2141 and the notch portion 2142 allow the guide rods 1720 and 1724 of the side prize opening member 1700 and the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 to extend to the rear side of the light emitting decoration base member 2140.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body 2004 of this example is fixedly supported on the rear side of the light emitting decorative base member 2140 and guided by the guide rods 1720 and 1724 of the side winning port member 1700 and the guide rod 1522 of the attacker unit 1500. A ball guiding member 2150 for receiving the game ball and guiding and discharging it to a predetermined position below is further provided. The ball guiding member 2150 includes a left ball guiding member 2150L corresponding to the side prize opening member 1700 disposed on the left side, and a right ball guiding member 2150R corresponding to the side prize opening member 1700 and the attacker unit 1500 disposed on the right side. It has.

  The ball guiding member 2150 is provided with a general winning port sensor 2151 for detecting a game ball guided by the guiding rods 1720 and 1724 of the side winning port member 1700 so as to correspond to the respective guiding rods 1720 and 1724. . The right ball guiding member 2150R of the ball guiding member 2150 is provided with a first start port sensor 2152 that detects a game ball guided by the guide rod 1522 of the attacker unit 1500.

  The light emitting decorative body 2004 further includes a frame-shaped light emitting partition member 2160 disposed between the diffusing lens member 2110 and the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 and configured to shield and partition the plurality of LEDs 2120 between the adjacent lens portions 2113. I have. More specifically, the light emitting section member 2160 is disposed on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L at a position corresponding to the left inner divided body 2104L of the decorative member 2100, and the left inner upper substrate 2133L and the left inner lower substrate 2134L. The left light-emitting partition member 2160L disposed on the front side and the rear inner side of the lower right lens member and the right inner divided body 2104R of the decorative member 2100 are disposed at positions corresponding to the right inner upper substrate 2133R and the right inner lower substrate 2134R. And a right light-emitting partition member 2160R disposed on the rear side.

  As shown in the figure, the light-emitting partition member 2160 is formed in a frame shape having an opening having substantially the same shape as the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110, and is thereby arranged on the rear side of a certain lens portion 2113. The light emitted from the LED 2120 is prevented from irradiating the other lens part 2113 so that each lens part 2113 (each opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100) can produce an independent light emission effect. It has become.

  The light-emitting decorative body 2004 of this example is configured in a plate shape by assembling the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, the light-emitting decorative substrate 2130, the light-emitting decorative base member 2140, and the like, as described above, and also as viewed from the front. In FIG. 2, the player can visually recognize from the player side through a transparent game panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400. And, by the three-dimensional light emitting decoration body 2004 that can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 599, compared with the conventional flat decoration in which the front of the game panel on the outer periphery of the center object is provided with a picture or a pattern, etc. It can attract the player's interest strongly.

[Center movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the center movable decorative body 2200 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the center movable decorative body as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the center movable decorative body as viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the center movable decorative body exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the center movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the diagonal front. It is. 116A is a perspective view showing a moving mechanism of the center movable decorative body, and FIG. 116B is a left side view showing a rotation mechanism of the center movable decorative body. FIG. 117 is a side view for explaining the movement of the buttocks of the center movable decorative body.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 of the present embodiment includes a hammer-shaped flange 2202 that can be moved in the left-right direction and can be rotated around an axis in the same direction as the moving direction. As shown in the figure, the flange 2202 has a cylindrical and bellows-shaped flange main body 2204 having a substantially flat striking surface 2206 formed at the tip thereof. The center movable decorative body 2200 can rotate the collar portion 2202 as if the display screen of the liquid crystal display screen 640 is struck by the striking surface 2206 of the heel portion 2202.

  Specifically, the center movable ornament 2200 includes a guide member 2208 extending in the left-right direction, a center base member formed of a metal plate that supports both ends of the guide member 2208 and can be fixed in the back box 2002. 2210, a motor base member 2212 fixed to the center base member 2210, a center moving motor 2214 fixed to the motor base member 2212 so that the rotation axis is directed in the vertical direction, and the rotation shaft of the center moving motor 2214 A moving drive gear 2216 fixed to the pin, a pinion gear 2218 that meshes with the moving drive gear 2216, has a larger diameter than the moving drive gear 2216, and is rotatably supported by the motor base member 2212. The direction substantially the same as the axial direction in which the guide member 2208 extends. A sliding body 2222 having an extended rack gear 2220 and guided by a guide member 2208, a heel support member 2224 fixed to the approximate center of the sliding body 2222, and a rotational axis of the heel support member 2224 in the axial direction of the guide member 2208 And the second gear 2230 meshing with the first gear 2228, the second gear 2228, and the second gear 2230 meshing with the first gear 2228. 2230 is fixed to the base end side, and is pivotally supported by the heel support member 2224 so that the distal end side extends substantially in the same direction as the axial direction of the guide member 2208, and on the distal end side of the rotation shaft 2232 And a handle portion 2234 to which the base portion is fixed and the flange portion 2202 is fixed to the tip.

  The guide member 2208 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is constituted by a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 2208a made of metal, and the guide shafts 2208a are center base members so as to be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. 2210 is supported. In addition, the surface of the guide shaft 2208a is subjected to a predetermined plating process so that the sliding resistance of the sliding body 2222 is reduced.

  As shown in the drawing, the center base member 2210 is formed by bending a sheet metal, and extends from the both ends of the main body portion 2210a extending in the substantially horizontal direction and extending in the left-right direction, and the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the main body portion 2210a. A support portion 2210b that is bent so as to hang downward and supports a pair of guide shafts 2208a as a guide member 2208 substantially parallel to each other at a predetermined interval, and is bent and formed so as to hang downward from the rear end of the main body portion 2210a. A fixing portion 2210c fixed to the box 2002, and a reinforcing piece 2210d that is bent so as to rise upward from the front end of the main body portion 2210a and have the same length as the main body portion 2210a are provided.

  The center base member 2210 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2210e penetrating in a predetermined shape in the main body portion 2210a and the fixing portion 2210c. The through hole 2210e can reduce the weight of the center base member 2210. Some of the through holes 2210e are used to avoid interference with other parts.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, an attachment hole and a positioning hole for fixing other components are appropriately formed in each part of the center base member 2210. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, a collar decoration board 2626 having an LED 2122 is provided inside the collar section 2202 (see FIG. 132), and light emission of the LED 2122 of the decoration board 2626 for the collar is performed. The collar 2202 can be decorated with light emission.

  The motor base member 2212 is formed of resin and supports the center moving motor so as to hang down. Further, the motor base member 2212 is located on the rear side of the guide member 2208 so that the pinion gear 2218 rotatably supported by the shaft is disposed at a position corresponding to the approximate center of the guide member 2208 in the axial direction. The base member 2210 is fixed to the lower side. As a result, the sliding body 2222 having the rack gear 2220 that meshes with the pinion gear 2218 can move over substantially the entire length of the guide member 2208.

  As shown in the drawing, the sliding body 2222 has a rectangular shape extending in the same left-right direction as the extending direction of the guide member 2208, and a rack gear 2220 is formed at the rear end thereof over the entire length. The sliding body 2222 is disposed between the main body 2210a of the center base member 2210 and the guide member 2208, and can rotate a roller 2236 that rolls on the guide shaft 2208a in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction). I support it. The sliding body 2222 is provided with a protruding portion 2222a that protrudes from the lower surface between the pair of guide shafts 2208a. A sliding body presser 2238 disposed on the opposite side of the roller 2236 with the guide shaft 2208a interposed therebetween is fixed to a lower portion of the protrusion 2222a corresponding to the position where the roller 2236 is disposed. . The roller 2236, the protruding portion 2222a of the sliding body 2222, and the sliding body presser 2238 allow the sliding body 2222 to move smoothly without dropping on the pair of guide shafts 2208a.

  The sliding body 2222 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 2222b that protrudes upward from a substantially center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and penetrates in the vertical direction inside. The cylindrical protrusion 2222b faces upward from a rectangular through hole 2210e extending long in the left-right direction of the main body 2210a of the center base member 2210. The cylindrical protrusion 2222b has a wiring cord connected to a hook motor 2226 and the like supported by a hook support member 2224 fixed to the lower surface of the sliding body 2222 inserted therethrough, and is used for the center. By extending the wiring cord upward through the through hole 2210e of the base member 2210, the wiring cord is prevented from coming into contact with the through hole 2210e of the center base member 2210.

  Further, the sliding body 2222 is provided with a moving position detecting piece 2222c that protrudes rearward above the rack gear 2220. The movement position detection piece 2222c can be detected by a center movement detection sensor 2240 fixedly supported by the motor base member 2212, and the movement position of the sliding body 2222 can be detected by being detected by the center movement detection sensor 2240. It is like that.

  The heel support member 2224 is fixed to the lower surface of the sliding body 2222 at the substantially center in the left-right direction corresponding to the space between the pair of guide shafts 2208a. The heel support member 2224 pivotally supports a pivot shaft 2232 for pivoting the heel portion 2202 at a rear position adjacent to the liquid crystal display device 640 disposed on the rear side (see FIG. 79). The motor 2226 is supported at a front position farther from the liquid crystal display device 640 than the rotation shaft 2232. Further, the heel support member 2224 is supported by a cylindrical portion 2224a that supports the rotation shaft 2232 so that the rotation shaft 2232 extends to the right in front view, and can cover the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 2232 that extends to the right. Is formed. A rotating shaft 2232 is pivotally supported by bearings 2242 fitted to both ends of the cylindrical portion 2224a. Further, the bag support member 2224 includes a board housing portion 2224b that opens to the left side of the bag and can store and hold the bag relay board 2244 for connection to the bag motor 2226 and the like.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 of this example has a front decorative member 2246 fixed on the surface so as to cover the front side of the heel support member 2224 with a relief-like idol, and the left side of the heel support member 2224. It further includes a left decorative member 2248 that is fixed so as to cover, and a right decorative member 2250 that is fixed so as to cover the right side surface side of the heel support member 2224. The front decorative member 2246, the left decorative member 2248, and the right decorative member 2250 cover the front and lower sides of the heel support member 2224, and both the left and right sides. The design is improved.

  The front decorative member 2246 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is provided with a through hole 2246a penetrating through a portion corresponding to the eye of an idol shaped in a relief shape, as shown in the figure. A lens member 2252 having translucency is disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2246. The lens member 2252 has a lens portion inserted into the through hole 2246a of the front decoration member 2246 on the front surface thereof. 2252a is formed. Further, on the rear side of the lens member 2252, a heel support portion decoration board 2254 on which the LEDs 2122 are mounted at a position corresponding to the lens portion 2252 a on the front surface is provided. The LED 2122 of the heel support portion decoration board 2254 allows the decoration of the idol of the front decoration member 2246 to be lit and blinking.

  Further, the right decorative member 2250 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is formed with an outer cylindrical portion 2250a extending rightward so as to surround the cylindrical portion 2224a of the heel support member 2224 as shown in the figure. The outer cylindrical portion 2250a has an inner shape that is large enough to form a predetermined gap with respect to the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 2224a, and has a shape extending in the vertical direction. In addition to the cylindrical portion 2224a, a predetermined wiring cord for connecting the flange relay board 2244 and the flange portion 2202 can also be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (B), the first gear 2228 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is formed with tooth portions 2228a formed only within a rotation angle range of about 90 degrees and tooth portions 2228a. And a rotation detecting piece 2228b protruding radially outward from the non-existing portion. The center movable decorative body 2200 is further provided with a rotation detection sensor 2256 that is fixed to the heel support member 2224 and can detect the rotation detection piece 2228b of the first gear 2228. The rotation position of the collar 2202 can be detected by the rotation detection piece 2228b and the rotation detection sensor 2256.

  Further, the second gear 2230 has a tooth portion 2230a meshing with the first gear 2228 formed only within a rotation angle range of about 90 degrees, and a position separated by a predetermined distance in the circumferential direction across the plurality of tooth portions 2230a. And a pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230b protruding outward in the radial direction. On the other hand, the collar support member 2224 is disposed below the shaft center of the second gear 2230, that is, the shaft shaft of the rotating shaft 2232 in FIG. A first abutting portion 2224c that abuts against the movement restricting piece 2230b, and a second abutting portion 2224d that is disposed on the left side of the axis of the rotation shaft 2232 and abuts against the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 from above. And. The rotation angle of the second gear 2230, that is, the rotation shaft 2232, by the pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230 b in the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224 c and the second contact portion 2224 d in the heel support member 2224. Are now regulated.

  Specifically, when the one rotation regulating piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224c of the heel support member 2224 are in contact, the flange portion 2202 is interposed via the rotation shaft 2232. In FIG. 116 (B), further rotation in the clockwise direction can be restricted. As a result, the striking surface 2206 of the collar 2202 rotates toward the liquid crystal display device 640 rather than the striking position (see FIG. 117B) that is as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. Thus, the flange 2202 can be reliably rotated and stopped at the striking position. On the other hand, when the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the second contact portion 2224d of the heel support member 2224 are in contact with each other, the heel portion 2202 is interposed via the rotation shaft 2232 in FIG. B) In the middle, it is possible to restrict further rotation in the counterclockwise direction. This restricts the striking surface 2206 of the collar 2202 from rotating to the opposite side from the striking position (see FIG. 117 (A)) farther from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. In this state, the flange 2202 can be reliably rotated and stopped at the swing-up position.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 is configured such that a handle 2234 that supports the collar 2202 is bent and extended in a “<” shape on a surface orthogonal to the rotation shaft 2232, as shown in the figure. The striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 can support the collar portion 2202 so as to substantially coincide with the surface passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 2232 (see FIG. 117). In this manner, the handle portion 2234 is bent, so that the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 rotated by the rotation shaft 2232 can be brought as close as possible to the liquid crystal display device 640. Yes. Further, the turning range of the heel portion 2202 can be made as small as possible, and the heel portion 2202 can be relatively enlarged to attract the player's interest strongly.

  The center moving motor 2214 and the scissors motor 2226 in the center movable decorative body 2200 of this example are stepping motors that can be stopped at every predetermined rotation angle, and their rotational positions can be finely controlled. The moving position of the sliding body 2222 and the rotational position of the collar 2202 can be finely controlled.

  Further, the center movable decorative body 2200 is arranged on the rear side of the heel support member 2224 and is fixed to the lower side of the center base member 2210 so that a predetermined decoration is formed on the surface thereof. Is further provided. As shown in the figure, the center back decoration member 2258 is formed to extend in the left-right direction, and is a box-shaped upper decoration part 2258a and a plate that hangs downward from the rear end of the upper decoration part 2258a. And a lower decorative portion 2258b. The center back decoration member 2258 has a plating layer with a silver metallic luster formed on the surface of the upper decoration portion 2258a, and the lower half of the surface of the lower decoration portion 2258b is gold and the upper half of the surface is copper. Each of the plating layers having the metallic luster is formed, and a transmission layer (not shown) having translucency is formed between the plating layers.

  In addition, a cutout portion 2258c opening upward is formed in the upper decoration portion 2258a of the center back decoration member 2258. The center moving motor 2214 and the like can be inserted into the upper decorative portion 2258a through the notch 2258c, and the center moving motor 2214 and the like are inserted into the upper decorative portion 2258a, whereby the center moving motor 2214 is inserted. Can be concealed from being seen from the player side by the upper decoration portion 2258a. The center back decoration plate 2258 is arranged at a position substantially along the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  Further, the center movable decorative body 2200 includes a diffusing lens member 2260 disposed on the rear side of the upper half side having the transmission layer of the lower decorative portion 2258b in the center back decorative member 2258, and a rear side of the diffusing lens member 2260. And a center back substrate 2262 on which the plurality of LEDs 2122 are mounted. Although not shown, the diffusion lens member 2260 includes a plurality of small-diameter lenses so that light from the LEDs 2122 on the center back substrate 2262 can be diffused widely. The member 2258 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the center back substrate 2262 is divided into a center back left substrate 2262a and a center back right substrate 2262b.

  In the center movable ornament 2200, the pinion gear 2218 that meshes with the movement drive gear 2216 is rotated by the movement drive gear 2216 being rotated by the center movement motor 2214. At this time, the pinion gear 2218 has a larger diameter than the movement drive gear 2216, so that the rotation speed of the pinion gear 2218 is higher than that of the movement drive gear 2216. That is, the rotational speed of the pinion gear 2218 is faster than the rotational speed of the center moving motor 2214. Then, the sliding body 2222 having the rack gear 2220 that meshes with the pinion gear 2218 by the rotation of the pinion gear 2218 moves in a direction corresponding to the direction in which the pinion gear 2218 rotates. At this time, the sliding body 2222 provided with the rack gear 2220 is guided in a state where the sliding resistance is as small as possible by a roller 2236 rolling on the pair of guide rods 2208a, and smoothly on the pair of guide rods 2208a. Can be moved to. The sliding body 2222 is configured such that both ends in the longitudinal direction (both ends in the left-right direction) are in contact with the support portion 2210b of the center base member 2210. Are now regulated.

  Further, in the center movable decorative body 2200, the first gear 2228 fixed to the rotation shaft thereof is rotated by the rotation of the heel motor 2226 of the heel support 2224 fixed to the sliding body 2222. When the second gear 2230 that meshes with the first gear 2228 is rotated, the rotation shaft 2232 is rotated together with the second gear 2230, and the hook 2234 is fixed to the distal end side of the rotation shaft 2232. The part 2202 is configured to rotate. As shown in FIG. 117, the flange 2202 is moved up from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 by rotating the hammer motor 2226 so that the striking surface 2206 becomes substantially horizontal (see FIG. )), And the striking surface 2206 is substantially vertical, the reciprocating rotation between the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the striking position close to the striking position (see FIG. 5B) can be performed. Note that the flange portion 2202 has an oscillating position and an impact position by the pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224c and the second contact portion 2224d of the support member 2224 for the flange. Rotation to the outside rather than between is regulated.

[Side movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the side movable decorative body 2300 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. 118 (A) is a perspective view of the left side movable decorative body as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 118 (B) is a perspective view of the left side movable decorative body as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the left side movable decorative body exploded and viewed from obliquely front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view showing a side moving mechanism of the left side movable decorative body. FIG. 121 (A) is a perspective view of the right side movable decorative body viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 121 (B) is a perspective view of the right side movable decorative body viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the right side movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 123 is a perspective view showing a side moving mechanism of the right side movable decorative body.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of the present embodiment includes a left side movable decorative body 2300L disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 640 in front view and a right side movable decorative body 2300R disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 640. It is configured. The left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R have substantially the same member configuration although they have different shapes. Hereinafter, the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are side movable. The decorative body 2300 will be described.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of this example includes a side decorative member 2302 that extends in the vertical direction and has a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the surface, a side moving mechanism 2304 that moves the side decorative member 2302 in the left-right direction, A side base member 2306 that supports the moving mechanism 2304 is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 and 122, the side decorative member 2302 in the side movable decorative body 2300 is a relief-shaped upper shape member 2308 which is shaped into a predetermined shape and has substantially translucency, and an upper decorative member 2308. A lower decorative member 2312 that is arranged on the lower side and is formed so that a plurality of transmissive portions 2310 having translucency are continuous with a part of the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 in the light emitting decorative body 2004; A diffusing lens member 2314 disposed on the rear side of the member 2308 and the lower decorative member 2312; a side decorative substrate 2316 disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 2314 with the surface facing forward and a plurality of LEDs 2124 mounted on the surface; It is mainly equipped with.

  The upper decorative member 2308 has a green crocodile character with a yellow hammer as a relief in the left side movable ornament 2300L, and a flame in red on the right side movable ornament 2300R. It is formed in a relief shape. In addition, the lower decorative member 2312 has a metallic luster (silver) plating layer formed on the surface other than the transmission portion 2310.

  The diffuser lens member 2314 is provided with a lens portion 2314a in which a plurality of small-diameter lenses are arranged at positions corresponding to the upper decorative member 2308 and the transmitting portion 2310 of the lower decorative member 2312. Light is diffused widely, and the transmissive part 2310 of the upper decorative member 2308 and the lower decorative member 2312 can emit light in a planar shape.

  Further, the side decoration member 2302 is arranged on the lower side of the upper decoration member 2308 and has a side upper decoration substrate 2318 in which a plurality of LEDs 2124 are mounted on the surface facing upward, a diffusing lens member 2314 and a side decoration substrate 2316. A frame-shaped light-emitting partition member 2320 that is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower decorative member 2312 between and the plurality of LEDs 2124 on the side decorative substrate 2316 and shields between the lens portions 2314a of the adjacent diffusion lens members 2314. Are further provided. The side upper decorative substrate 2318 is arranged at a predetermined position by supporting the left and right ends thereof by a pair of substrate support portions 2314b formed so as to protrude forward on the front surface of the diffusing lens member 2314. ing. Further, the light emitting partition member 2320 is formed in a frame shape having an opening having substantially the same shape as the transmission portion 2310 of the lower decorative member 2312, and is emitted from the LED 2124 disposed on the rear side of a certain lens portion 2314a. The light is prevented from irradiating the other lens portion 2134a, and each lens portion 2314a can perform an independent light emission effect.

  The side decorative member 2302 is configured such that the upper decorative member 2308, the lower decorative member 2312, the side decorative substrate 2316, the side upper decorative substrate 2318, the light emitting partition member 2320, and the like are fixed to the diffusing lens member 2314. The diffuser lens member 2314 plays a role as a base of the side decoration member 2302.

  The side moving mechanism 2304 in the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixedly supported by the side motor base 2322 fixed to the upper front portion of the side base member 2306 and the side motor base 2322 so that the rotation axis faces the front-rear direction. Side motor 2324, pinion gear 2326 fixed to the rotation shaft of side motor 2324, and fixed to side motor base 2322 so as to cover the front side of pinion gear 2326 and side motor base 2322, and a predetermined decoration on the front side The side motor base cover 2328, the side motor base cover 2328, and the side motor base 2322 are guided in the left-right direction and support the upper part of the diffusing lens member 2314 in the side decoration member 2302, and the pinion gear 23 A 6 meshed with the sliding member 2332 having a rack gear 2330 extending horizontally mainly provided.

  The side moving mechanism 2304 is formed on each of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328, and is disposed so as to face each other with the slide member 2332 interposed therebetween. The side moving mechanism 2304 extends in the left-right direction and has a flat upper surface. Guide portions 2322a and 2328a, two roller shafts 2334 that are inserted into and supported by bearing holes 2332a that extend above the guide portions 2322a and 2328a and are provided near the both ends in the left-right direction below the rack gear 2330 of the slide member 2332; A plurality of rollers 2336 inserted on both ends of the roller shaft 2334 and rolling on the guide portions 2322a and 2328a are further provided.

  In the side moving mechanism 2304, a plurality of rollers 2336 that are pivotally supported by a slide member 2332 via a roller shaft 2334 roll on the guide portions 2322 a and 2328 a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328. Thus, the slide member 2332 is guided in the left-right direction in which the guide portions 2322a and 2328a extend. The guide portions 2322a and 2328a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328 are disposed below the pinion gear 2326 fixed to the rotation shaft of the side motor 2324, and the side motor 2324 is disposed. Is fixed to the side motor base 2322 so that the rotation axis thereof is substantially in the same position as the center of the guide portions 2322a and 2328a in the left-right direction.

  The side movement mechanism 2304 includes a movement detection piece 2332b (see FIGS. 120 and 123) formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the slide member 2332, and a lower side of the side motor base 2322 by detecting the movement detection piece. And a side movement detection 2338 sensor fixed to the head. By detecting the movement detection piece 2332b of the slide member 2332 by the side movement detection sensor 2338, the movement position of the slide member 2332 in the left-right direction can be detected.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of this example further includes a rectangular decorative plate 2340 extending in the vertical direction and fixed to the front surface of the side base member 2306 on the rear side of the side decorative member 2302. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the decorative plate 2340 is formed with a locking piece 2340a protruding outward in the left-right direction on one side in the left-right direction, and a side where the locking piece 2340a is formed. On the opposite side, an elastic locking piece 2340b protruding rearward is formed. Each of the locking pieces 2340a and the elastic locking pieces 2340b is formed two by two, and is arranged with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. It can be fixed to the base member 2306 for use. The decorative plate 2340 has a copper-colored metallic luster and has a predetermined pattern. When the side decorative member 2302 is moved by the side moving mechanism 2304, the side base member 2306 is moved from the player side. It can be made invisible.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 includes a plate-shaped guide plate 2342 fixed to the lower end of the diffusing lens member 2314 in the side decorative member 2302, and a guide in a state where the guide plate 2342 can move within a predetermined range with respect to the front-rear direction. It further includes a guide box 2344 that guides the plate 2342 in the left-right direction and is fixed to the lower portion of the side base member 2306. The guide box 2344 is formed with a guide groove 2344a extending in the left-right direction with a predetermined amount of clearance in the front-rear direction with respect to the guide plate 2342, and the guide plate 2344a (side decoration) The lower end of the member 2302 can move within a predetermined range with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The side base member 2306 in the side movable decorative body 2300 of this example is formed by bending a sheet metal as shown in the figure, and a main body 2306a that extends long in the vertical direction with the surface facing forward, and a main body It mainly includes a guide support portion 2306b that is bent so as to be substantially horizontal from the lower end of the portion 2306a and supports the guide box 2344. The main body 2306a of the side base member 2306 is formed with a rectangular decorative plate locking hole 2306c into which the locking piece 2340a and the elastic locking piece 2340b of the decorative plate 2340 are inserted and locked. A plurality of through holes 2306d penetrating in the shape are formed. The side base member 2306 is reduced in weight by the through hole 2306d.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the main body 2306a of the side base member 2306 is formed such that the long side on the side away from the liquid crystal display device 640 is linearly arranged in the back box 2002 of the back unit 2000. In addition, the long side closer to the liquid crystal display device 640 is formed in a non-linear shape. The side base member 2306 further includes a reinforcing piece 2306e that is bent so as to extend forward from the long side of the main body 2306a that is formed in a straight line, and has substantially the same length as the main body 2306a. . The rigidity of the side base member 2306 is enhanced by the reinforcing piece 2306e.

  An attachment hole, a positioning hole, and the like for fixing the side motor base 2322, the guide box 2344, and the like are formed in the body portion 2306a of the side base member 2306 at appropriate positions.

  In the side movable decorative body 2300 of this example, when the pinion gear 2326 is rotated by the side motor 2324 that is a stepping motor, the slide member 2332 having the rack gear 2330 that meshes with the pinion gear 2326 is moved to the left and right corresponding to the rotation direction of the pinion gear 2326. Will move in the direction. At that time, the slide member 2332 slides as much as possible by rolling a roller 2336 rotatably supported on the guide portions 2322a and 2328a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328. It is guided in a state of low resistance and can move smoothly in the left-right direction. As the slide member 2332 moves, the side decoration member 2302 supported by the slide member 2332 moves in the left-right direction.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 is fixedly supported by the back box 2002 so that the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are located near the left and right ends of the liquid crystal display device 640 in a front view, Each side moving mechanism 2304 moves in the left-right direction between an approach position in which the side decoration members 2302 move in the approaching direction and a separation position in which the side decoration members 2302 move away from each other. Can be done. When the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are positioned at the approach positions, the side decorative members 2302 cover the liquid crystal display device 640 in the vicinity of the left and right ends. The display screen of the display device 640 becomes a state narrowed in the left-right direction. In addition, when the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are positioned at the separated positions, both sides of the display screen covered by the respective side decorative members 2302 are less than the approach position, and the display screen is displayed. It will be in the state where it became wide in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the visible area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be narrowed or widened by the movement of the side movable decorative body 2300.

  Further, the side movable decorative body 2300 includes a side decorative member 2302 having a side moving mechanism 2304 configured by a slide member 2332 having a side motor base 2322, a side motor 2324, a pinion gear 2326, a rack gear 2330, and the like. Only the upper part is supported, and the lower part is moved in the left-right direction with a predetermined play by the guide box 2344, and the side decoration member 2302 can be moved in a flared state. It can be done.

  In addition, the slide member 2330 is configured such that both ends in the left-right direction are restricted by the both ends in the left-right direction coming into contact with the inner sides of the left and right side surfaces of the side motor base 2322 formed in a box shape. Yes.

[Under movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the under movable decorative body 2400 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. FIG. 124 (A) is a perspective view of the under movable decorative body viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 124 (B) is a perspective view of the under movable decorative body viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the under movable decorative body as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view showing an under movement mechanism of the under movable decorative body.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 of the present embodiment is disposed at the front center and the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 640 in the front view and at the approximate center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 131) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape on the outer periphery. The under decoration member 2402 in which the decoration is formed, an under movement mechanism 2404 that moves the under decoration member 2402 in the vertical direction, and an under base member 2406 that supports the under movement mechanism 2404 are mainly provided. The under movable decorative body 2400 is moved by the under movement mechanism 2404 so that the under decorative member 2402 is located at a lower position than the liquid crystal display device 640 and is raised at a front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can be moved (lifted) between positions.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the under decorative member 2402 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an annular window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 having a three-dimensional decoration formed on the surface, and a ring inside the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408. And a transparent lens member 2410 inserted from the rear side so as to be closed. The window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 is formed with a substantially circular window portion 2408a, and the lens member 2410 is fixed from the rear side so as to close the window portion 2408a. In addition, character bodies 2408b formed with a crocodile motif are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the window portion 2408a so as to face each other.

  The under movement mechanism 2404 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an under movement motor 2412 that is fixed to the rear side of the under base member 2406 and whose rotation shaft projects to the front side of the under base member 2406, and an under movement motor. A pinion gear 2414 fixed to the rotation shaft 2412, a rack gear 2416 (see FIG. 126) meshing with the pinion gear 2414, and a rack member 2418 formed so as to extend in the vertical direction, are fixed to the upper portion of the rack member 2418. A sliding body 2420 that can be guided in the vertical direction by the under base member 2406 and supports the under decoration member 2402 is mainly provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the sliding body 2420 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an annular decorative body support portion 2420a that supports and fixes the under decorative member 2402, and an arm portion 2420b that extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the decorative body support portion 2420a. , And a rack fixing portion 2420c that is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction below the arm portion 2402b and the decorative body support portion 2420a and to which the upper portion of the rack member 2418 is bonded and fixed. The decorative body support portion 2420a of the sliding body 2420 has a concave portion 2420d that is recessed toward the rear side on the front surface side, and the outer periphery of the lens member 2410 of the under decorative member 2402 is fitted into the concave portion 2420. The lens frame 2410 is sandwiched between the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 and the decorative body supporting portion 2420a by fixing the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 to the decorative body supporting portion 2420 from the front side. An under decorative member 2402 is fixed to the portion 2420a. The sliding body 2420 is formed with through holes 2420e penetrating in the front-rear direction in the left and right arm portions 2420b. Note that a movement detection piece 2420f that extends in the vertical direction and protrudes rearward is formed on the rear side of the sliding body 2420 (see FIG. 126).

  The under movement mechanism 2404 has a support pin 2422 inserted into the through hole 2420e of the slide body 2420 so as to protrude rearward from the rear side of the slide body 2420, and a rear end of the support pin 2422 and is attached to the front end. It further includes a bushing 2424 having a flange portion 2424a projecting outward, and a washer 2426 attached to the support pin 2422 from the rear side of the bushing 2424 and having a larger diameter than the bushing 2424. In addition, a groove in which a stop ring (not shown) such as a C ring or an E ring can be attached is formed at both ends of the support pin 2422. By attaching a stop ring to both ends of the support pin 2422, The support pin 2422 can be prevented from coming out of the through hole 2420e, and the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 can be prevented from coming off from the support pin 2422.

  On the other hand, the under base member 2406 in the under movable decorative body 2400 is larger in the left-right direction than the sliding body 2420, and a long hole 2406a extending in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 2420e of the sliding body 2420. It is formed to penetrate. Then, the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 supported by the support pin 2422 of the under movement mechanism are disposed forward and backward with the long hole 2406a of the under base member 2406 interposed therebetween, so that the support pin 2422 is vertically moved by the long hole 2406a. Thus, the sliding body 2420 having the support pins 2422, that is, the under decorative member 2402 is guided in the vertical direction by the under base member 2406.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 further includes an under movement detection sensor 2428 that is fixed to the under base member 2406 and that can detect the movement detection piece 2420f of the sliding body 2420. By detecting the movement detection piece 2420f by the under movement detection sensor 2428, the movement position (upward position) of the sliding body 2420, that is, the under decoration member 2402 can be detected.

  Furthermore, the under movable decorative body 2400 further includes an under cover member 2430 that is fixed to the front side of the under base member 2406 and covers the front side of the under movement mechanism 2402. The under cover member 2430 and the under base member 2406 cover a lower portion of the under movement mechanism 2402 than the arm portion 2420b.

  In the under movable decorative body 2400 of this example, when the pinion gear 2414 is rotated by the under motor 2412 made of a stepping motor, the sliding body 2420 fixed to the upper portion of the rack member 2418 having the rack gear 2416 meshing with the pinion gear 2414 is It moves up and down corresponding to the direction of rotation of 2414. At this time, the sliding body 2420 moves smoothly in the vertical direction by the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 supported by the support pins 2422 being guided by the elongated holes 2406a extending in the vertical direction of the under base member 2406. Can be done. In addition, since the rack gear 2414 is disposed at substantially the center of the two long holes 2406a extending in the vertical direction, the force acts substantially equally on the left and right support pins 2422 inserted into the long holes 2406a. The sliding body 2420 can be moved up and down without rattling. As the sliding body 2420 moves, the under decorative member 2402 fixed to the sliding body 2420 can move in the vertical direction.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 can move in the vertical direction between a lowered position where the under decorative member 2402 is lowered most and an elevated position where the under decorative member 2402 is raised most. In the state where the under decorative member 2402 is lowered to the lowered position. The under decorative member 2402 is positioned below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the under decorative member 2402 is positioned at the front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 when the under decorative member 2402 is raised to the raised position. It has become. Although details will be described later, when the under decorative member 2402 is located at the raised position, there are other parts located on the rear side of the window portion 2408a of the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 of the display screen in the liquid crystal display device 640. It is possible to display an image different from the display portion of the display part, and this makes it appear to the player as if the image is displayed on the window 2408a of the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Note that the bush 2424 supported by the support pin 2422 is in contact with the upper end and the lower end of the long hole 2406a, so that both the upper and lower moving ends of the sliding body 2420, that is, the under decorative member 2402 are regulated. .

[Back box]
A detailed configuration of the back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127A is a perspective view of the back box in a state where the liquid crystal display device or the like is supported as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 127B is a perspective view of the back box of FIG. 128 is a rear view of the back box of FIG. 127 viewed from the back, and FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view in which the back box of FIG. 127 is disassembled for each main member and viewed obliquely from the front.

  The back unit 2000 of this embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 640 that is fixedly supported from the rear side on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 so as to close the opening 2012 of the rear wall 2014, and a liquid crystal display device 640. A panel relay board 1352 that is fixed to the left side in the rear view and connected to the main control board 1350 and the like of the main control board box 624 and a panel relay board 1352 that is fixed to the right side in the rear view and connected to the panel relay board 1352. The first decoration control board box 1356 that houses the first decoration control board 1354 that controls the light emission effects and the movable effects of the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006, and the first decoration control of the first decoration control board box 1356. The light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 200 are connected to the substrate 1354 and cooperate with the first decorative control substrate 1354. The second decoration control board 1358 for controlling the light emission effect, the movable effect, etc. is mainly accommodated, and the second decoration control board box 1360 having one end fixed to the back box 2002 and the other end fixedly supported by the liquid crystal display device 640 is mainly provided. ing.

  The back unit 2000 is fixed to the rear side of the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 on the left side in the rear view of the opening 2012, and supports a liquid crystal display device 640 on one side, and a liquid crystal support member 1370 is further provided with a liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 that is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 2012 and detachably supports the other side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640.

  The back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 of this example has a rectangular shape in front view, a rectangular tube-shaped outer tube portion 2016 extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and a flange shape extending outward from the front end of the outer tube portion 2016. A plurality of fixing portions 2018, a rear wall 2014 that closes the rear end opening of the outer cylinder portion 2016, and a substantially rectangular opening 2012 that penetrates the rear wall 2014. The fixing portion 2018 is formed with a fixing hole 2020 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a positioning projection 2022 that protrudes forward. After the fixing portion 2018 is brought into contact with the rear surface side of the panel holder 600, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting holes 600j and 635a of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 through the fixing hole 2020. The box 2002, that is, the back unit 2000 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600.

  Further, the positioning protrusion 2022 is fitted into positioning holes 600k and 635b formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 so that the relative position between the panel holder 600 and the back unit 2000 can be positioned. It has become. As shown in the figure, the positioning holes 600k and 635b are square holes with respect to the columnar positioning protrusion 2022, and the contact area between the positioning protrusion 2022 and the positioning holes 600k and 635b is reduced. The insertion resistance can be reduced, and the insertion can be easily performed.

  The back box 2002 has a mounting hole for mounting and fixing the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like on the front side of the rear wall 2014 and the inner peripheral side of the outer cylinder portion 2016, and a mounting hole at the tip. The provided bosses and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the back box 2002 of this example has a distance (depth) from the front surface to the rear wall 2014 in the range of 50 mm to 100 mm.

  Further, the back box 2002 includes a liquid crystal support shelf 2024 that extends in the left-right direction substantially along the lower side of the opening 2012 below the opening 2012 on the rear side of the rear wall 2014, and extends rearward by a predetermined amount. A plurality of positioning bosses 2026 arranged substantially along the side of the opening 2012 on the left side of the opening 2012 and projecting rearward to position the liquid crystal support member 1370, and the side on which the positioning boss 2026 is arranged are the opening. And a lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 that is arranged on the opposite side with a predetermined distance apart on the opposite side of 2012 and to which the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 is fixed. By placing the lower end of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the liquid crystal support shelf 2024, the weight of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be supported.

  Further, the positioning boss 2026 can be inserted and fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed on the front side of the liquid crystal support member 1370 so that the liquid crystal support member 1370 can be positioned at a predetermined position, and the positioning boss 20 A mounting hole is formed at the center of the rear surface of 2026, and a predetermined mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole from the rear side through the liquid crystal support member 1370, thereby fixing the liquid crystal support member 1370 to the rear side of the rear wall 2014. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 130, the liquid crystal support member 1370 is provided with a concave groove 1370a that is arranged at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and opens on the front side and the left and right sides. The concave groove 1370a has a position and a size corresponding to the fixing piece 640a extending outward from one side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. By fixing the liquid crystal support member 1370 to the back box 2002, the concave groove 1370a is obtained. And the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 is such that one fixed piece 640a of the liquid crystal display device 640 is restricted from moving in the vertical and left directions and further in the front and rear direction when viewed from the back. Although illustration is omitted, two fixing pieces 640 a are also provided on the other side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640.

  The liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 fixed to the lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 of the back box 2002 is slidable in the left-right direction by the lock base 1372a having a guide portion fixed to the lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 and extending in the left-right direction. And a lock slider 1372b supported by the robot. When the liquid crystal display device 640 is set on the rear surface of the back box 2002 while the lock base 1372a of the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 is fixed to the back box 2002, the other fixed piece 640a (not shown) of the liquid crystal display device 640 is locked. The base 1372a is in a state where movement in the vertical and right directions is restricted in rear view, and the movement in the forward direction is restricted by the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002. In this state, the lock slider 1372b is slid in the direction approaching the liquid crystal display device 640 along the lock base 1372a (leftward in rear view), so that the other fixed piece 640a is moved backward by the lock slider 1372b. Being regulated.

  Accordingly, the liquid crystal display device 640 can be fixedly supported on the rear surface of the back box 2002 by the liquid crystal support member 1370 and the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 fixed on the rear surface side of the back box 2002. Further, by sliding the lock slider 1372b of the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 away from the liquid crystal display device 640 (rightward in rear view), the other fixed piece 640a can be moved backward, and in this state, the liquid crystal display By moving the other fixed piece 640a side of the device 640 rearward and detaching the other fixed piece 640a from the lock base 1372a, the liquid crystal display device 640 is moved diagonally right rearward in rear view, The fixing piece 640a can be removed from the concave groove 1370a of the liquid crystal support member 1370 so that the liquid crystal display device 640 can be removed from the rear surface side of the back box 2002. That is, the liquid crystal display device 640 can be detachably supported with respect to the back box 2002.

  In the back box 2002 of this example, as shown in FIG. 130, a panel relay substrate fixing portion 2030 for fixing the panel relay substrate 1352 on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 and below the liquid crystal support shelf 2024, and a first A first decoration control board box fixing portion 2032 for fixing the decoration control board box 1356 is provided. In addition, a rectangular opening 2034 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed on the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 between the panel relay board fixing portion 2030 and the first decoration control board box 2032. It is possible to prevent the under motor 2412 of the under movable decorative body 2400 fixed in the back box 2002 from protruding rearward and coming into contact with the rear wall 2014 (see FIG. 104).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 130, the back box 2002 is disposed above the opening 2012 on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 and supports the upper end of the second decoration control board box 1360. Is provided. The back box side support portion 2036 is formed in a hook shape with the upper side opened, and two back box side support portions 2036 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In addition, on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal display device 640, the lower end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported at a position below the back box side support portion 2036 while being fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002. A display-side support 640b is provided. The display side support portion 640b is formed in a box shape whose upper side is open. On the other hand, the second decoration control board box 1360 has a shaft-like locking portion 1360a that is disposed at the upper end portion and is supported by the back box side support portion 2036, and a display-side support portion 640b that is disposed at the lower end portion. And an elastic locking portion 1360b to be stopped. The locking part 1360a of the second decoration control board box 1360 is locked and supported by the hook-like back box side support part 2036 from above, so that it can be attached to and detached from the back box side support part 2036 and can be rotated. It has come to be supported. The elastic locking portion 1360b of the second decoration control board box 1360 is formed with a locking projection 1360d protruding downward on the lower surface of the elastic piece 1360c that can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction. The rearward movement of the lower end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is restricted by abutting with the rear wall inner side (front side) of the display side support portion 640b.

  Accordingly, the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported by the back box side support part 2036 of the back box 2002 and the display side support part 640b of the liquid crystal display device 640, so that the back box 2002 is supported. It is fixed to the rear side. The second decoration control board box 1360 may be fixed and supported on the rear surface side of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640 after the liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002, or When the upper end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is previously supported by the back box support 2036 of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the back box 2002, the back box support 2036 is fixed. The liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002 with the lower end thereof being pivoted upward so that the second decoration control board box 1360 is substantially horizontal about The lower end portion of the decoration control board box 1360 is pivoted downward so that the decoration control board box 1360 becomes substantially vertical, and the elastic locking portion 1360b of the lower end portion is supported on the display side support of the liquid crystal display device 640. The second decorative control board box 1360 by engaged in part 640b may be fixed to the rear side of the back box 2002.

  Accordingly, when removing the liquid crystal display device 640 from the back box 2002, it is necessary to remove at least the elastic locking portion 1360b of the second decoration control board box 1360 from the liquid crystal side support portion 640b, and the liquid crystal display device 640 can be easily removed. It can be prevented from being removed. Further, the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported by the back box 2002 for the time being by locking and supporting the locking part 1360a of the second decoration control board box 1360 to the back box side support part 2036 of the back box 2002. Even when the liquid crystal display device 640 is not fixed, the operation of the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 provided in the back unit 2000 can be confirmed.

  The back box 2002 is connected to the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 so that the base end side protrudes from the rear surface of the rear wall 2014 to the rear side, and the front end side is connected to the rear surface of the rear wall 2014 with a wiring cord ( (Not shown) is a free end that forms a gap that cannot pass, and a plurality of substantially linear cord holding pieces 2038 that can form a gap through which the wiring cord can pass are provided between the base end side and the distal end side. ing. These cord holding pieces 2038 are formed integrally with the back box 2002 and are arranged so as to hold the wiring cords substantially along the outer periphery of the opening 2012 of the back box 2002.

  The back unit 2000 of this example has a center movable decorative body 2200, a side movable decorative body 2300, and an under movable decorative body 2400 in the movable decorative body 2006 on the front side (inside the back box 2002) of the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 described above. The center base member 2210, the side base member 2306, and the under base member 2406 are fixed at predetermined positions, and the light emitting decorative body 2100 is fixed to the front side of the back box 2002 on the front side of the movable decorative body 2006. As a result, an integrated unit is configured.

  In addition, the opening part 599e in this embodiment is equivalent to the through-hole of this invention. Further, the second decoration control board 1358 in the present embodiment corresponds to the peripheral control board of the present invention, and the second decoration control board box 1360 in the present embodiment corresponds to the peripheral control board box of the present invention. . Further, the front decorative member 2246, the left decorative member 2248, the right decorative member 2250, the side decorative member 2302, and the under decorative member 2402 in the present embodiment correspond to the movable decorative member of the present invention.

<Control configuration with main board and peripheral control board>
A detailed control configuration by the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. 131 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 132 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is roughly divided into a group of main boards 2500 including a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186, and peripheral control including a first decoration control board 1354, a second decoration control board 1358, and the like. It is shared by a group of substrates 2600. The group of main boards 2500 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral control boards 2600 has stage effects (light emitting decoration, movable effects, sound output, liquid crystal) Display etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500 includes a CPU 2502 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2504 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2506 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 2502 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2504, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 2600 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 2506 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 2530 via the relay terminal board 625, the payout control board 1186, and the power supply relay terminal board 2528, so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2530. ing.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 detects, via the panel relay terminal board 1352, a gate sensor 1612 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 1602 of the gate member 1600, and a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 1702. General winning opening sensor 2151, a first starting opening sensor 2152 for detecting a gaming ball winning in the first starting opening 1502, a second starting opening sensor 1516 for detecting a gaming ball winning in the second starting opening 1506, and an attacker unit 1500. A count sensor 1518 that detects a game ball that has won a prize winning opening 1510 and an all winning prize winning number detection sensor 2508 for counting the number of winnings for all winning prize openings are connected.

  In addition, an operation sensor 2510 for detecting an operation state of an operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via a relay terminal board 625 is provided as an input interface of the main control board 1350. A body frame opening switch 2512 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 2514 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes an opening / closing solenoid 1512 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1504 that can open / close the second starting opening 1506 and an opening / closing that can close the special winning opening 1510 of the attacker unit 1500. An attacker solenoid 1514 that opens and closes the member 1508 is connected, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 1350. The output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes a normal symbol display 1806, first and second special symbol displays 1802 and 1804, and a normal symbol memory number display via a normal symbol / special symbol display board 2516. 1812, first and second special symbol memory number indicators 1808, 1810 are connected, and from the main control board 1350, the normal symbol indicator 1806 provided in the symbol display device 1800 and the first and second special symbol displays. It is possible to output drive signals to the devices 1802, 1804, etc.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 2518 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2520 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2522 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the firing control board 2524. Accordingly, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side is notified to the hall side (hall computer). The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, notification is made by performing a display indicating that “please remove the game ball from the storage unit 381”, outputting a sound, or the like.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via the respective input / output interfaces. An ACK signal is returned from the control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal board 2526 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning state to the start opening 1502, 1506, the big winning opening 1510, etc., the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the special Various information such as a gaming state based on each lottery result, such as a lottery result or a normal lottery result, is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 132, the peripheral control board 2600 has electronic components such as a CPU 2602, a ROM 2604, a RAM 2606, etc., and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a ROM 2608 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2610 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2608. It has been. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600, and the main control board 2500 to the peripheral control board 2600. Even if the command signal is transmitted, the reverse is not performed. The peripheral control board 2600 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2528.

  Note that either the first decoration control board 1354 and the second decoration control board 1358 constituting the peripheral control board 2600 may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610, or only one of them may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610. You may do it.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 2612 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 2612, the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2600 is processed by the liquid crystal display control board 2612, and a drive signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 640. To do. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 2612 includes a CPU 2614, a RAM 2616, a ROM 2618, a VDP 2620, and an image ROM 2622.

  The CPU 2614 of the liquid crystal display control board 2612 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2600 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command signal to control the VDP 2620. The RAM 2616 provides a work area for the CPU 2614 and temporarily stores information included in the command signal. The ROM 2618 holds a program for the CPU 2614 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 2620 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2620, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2620, setting information of various display functions, and the like. The CPU 2614 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2622 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the peripheral control board 2600 and the power supply relay terminal plate 2528.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided in the door frame 5 and a speaker 163 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. From the peripheral control board 2600, these lamps are connected. A drive signal is output to the speaker 163 and the like.

  The peripheral control board 2600 has operation buttons 330 including three operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c (signs are in order from the left) arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. They are connected to each other, and the operation signals of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are inputted.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 includes the upper left board 2131L, the upper right board 2131R, the lower left board 2132L, the lower right board 2132R, the upper left board 2133L, and the upper right board as the light emitting decoration board 2130 in the light emitting decoration body 2004. The board 2133R, the left inner lower board 2134L, and the right inner lower board 2134R are connected to each other, and each LED 2120 is appropriately driven to emit light by outputting a driving signal from the peripheral control board 2600 to the LED 2120 mounted on each board. Thus, the light emitting decoration body 2004 can be decorated with light emission (light emission effect).

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to the center moving motor 2214, the center movement detecting sensor 2240, and the center back board 2262 of the center movable decoration body 2200 in the movable decoration body 2006, and the relay board 2244 for the bag. The bag motor 2226, the rotation detection sensor 2256, the bag support part decoration board 2254, and the bag decoration board 2626 are connected to each other. Then, signals from the center movement detection sensor 2240 and the rotation detection sensor 2256 are input to the peripheral control board 2600, and based on these signals, the sliding body 2222 that moves in the left-right direction by the center movement motor 2214, The heel portion 2202 that rotates as if the liquid crystal display device 640 is struck by the heel motor 2226 can be returned to the origin. Further, by outputting a drive signal from the peripheral control board 2600 to the LED 2122 mounted on the heel support decoration board 2254 or the heel decoration board 2626, each LED 2122 is appropriately driven to emit light, and the front decoration member 2246 or the center back decoration. The member 2258 can be decorated with light emission (light emission effect). The center moving motor 2214 and the scissors motor 2226 are bidirectionally connected to the peripheral control board 2600, and the moving position and rotation of the sliding body 2222 and the collar portion 2202 are fed back by feedback of the rotational position. The position can be controlled with high accuracy, and a desired movable effect can be produced.

  Further, a side decoration board 2316, a side upper decoration board 2318, a side motor 2324, and a side movement detection sensor 2338 of the side movable decoration body 2300 in the movable decoration body 2006 are connected to the peripheral control board 2600. By outputting drive signals to the LEDs 2124 mounted on the board 2316 and the side upper decoration board 2318, each LED 2124 can appropriately emit light, and the side decoration member 2302 can be illuminated (light emission effect). Yes. Further, when a detection signal from the side movement detection sensor 2338 is input to the peripheral control board 2600, the side decoration member 2302 that moves in the left-right direction by the side motor 2324 can be returned to the origin based on the signal. The side motor 2324 is bi-directionally connected to the peripheral control board 2600, and the rotational position of the side motor 2324 can be fed back to control the movement position of the side decoration member 2302 with high accuracy. It is possible to make a movable production. In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 can independently control the light emitting effect and the movable effect for the left side movable decorative body 2300L disposed on the left side and the right side movable decorative body 2300R disposed on the right side. It is like that.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to an under motor 2412 and an under movement detection sensor 2428 of the under movable decoration body 2400 in the movable decoration body 2006. A detection signal from the under movement detection sensor 2428 is connected to the peripheral control board 2600. Is input, the under decoration member 2402 moved in the vertical direction by the under motor 2412 can be returned to the origin based on the signal. The under motor 2412 is bi-directionally connected to the peripheral control board 2600, and the rotational position of the under decorative member 2402 can be controlled with high accuracy by feeding back the rotation position. It is possible to make a movable production.

<Game effect control>
The game contents and game effects of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 150. FIG. 133 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the present invention. FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration on the main control board, and FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration on the peripheral control board. FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the arrangement of the movable decorative body in the normal gaming state, and (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example of the movement of the movable decorative body in the reach development effect. is there. FIG. 137 is an explanatory view schematically showing an example of reach development effects different from FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the door symbol display mode and the operation lottery probability in the reach development effect of FIG. 137. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view schematically showing an example of a movable effect by a movable decorative body.

  141 is an explanatory view schematically showing an example of reach development effects further different from those shown in FIGS. 136 (a) and 137, and FIG. 142 is an explanation schematically showing an example of reach development effects following FIG. FIG. FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram showing various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. 141, and FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the amount of crocodile appearance and hit determination in the reach development effect of FIG. 141. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the first half appearance pattern in the reach development effect of FIG. 141, and FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the appearance pattern table selection table in the reach development effect of FIG. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the latter half of the appearance pattern selection table in the reach development effect of FIG. 141, and FIGS. 148 and 149 are various examples of the latter half of the appearance pattern in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows. Further, FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning probability selection table for operation lottery used in the special effect specification in the reach development effect of FIG.

  First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 1350 will be described with reference to FIG. 134 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 1350 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are implemented by executing predetermined programs stored in the ROM 2504 in advance by the CPU 2502. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 1612 to the main control board 1350, a normal random number generator 2550 for generating a predetermined normal random number and a normal random number generated by the normal random number generator 2550 are temporarily stored. Ordinary symbol hold storage means 2554 for storing automatically, normal symbol hit judgment means 2553 for judging whether or not to win (ordinary hit) based on a normal random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 2554, and a normal symbol The normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 2552 that selects a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the determination result of the hit determination unit 2553 from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the ROM 2504 and the normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 2552 have selected. Based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1806 is displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbol per unit determination means 2553 determines “normal hit” based on the normal symbol display control means 2556 and the normal random number extracted to the normal symbol display 1806 by the normal symbol display control means 2556, the start port solenoid The start opening / closing control means 2558 for driving 1512 to expand the pair of movable pieces 1504 and the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage means 2554 are displayed on the ordinary symbol memory number display 1812 as the stored number. And a normal symbol memory number display control means 2560.

  When the normal symbol display control unit 2556 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner, the normal symbol hold storage unit 2554 described above receives the normal random number generation unit 2550 using the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 1612 as a trigger. When generated, the generated ordinary random numbers are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Further, the normal symbol hold storage means 2554 stores the normal random numbers in the order of occurrence, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is completed and the next fluctuation display can be started, the earliest (the order of occurrence is the oldest). ) Based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol per unit determination means 2553 determines whether or not to make a normal hit. Further, the normal symbol hold storage unit 2554 determines whether the normal symbol hit determination unit 2553 determines whether or not to make a normal hit based on the first common random number among the normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 2554. Then, by discarding the earliest ordinary random number, an area capable of storing the ordinary random number is increased by one.

  Further, when a detection signal is input to the main control board 1350 from the first start port sensor 2152 by a start winning to the first start port 1502, first special random number generating means 2562 for generating a predetermined first special random number. A first special symbol hold storage unit 2566 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated by the first special random number generation unit 2562, and a first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 2566 Corresponding to the determination result of the first special symbol per unit 2565 and the first special symbol per unit determination unit 2565 for determining whether or not to make a hit (small hit, big hit) based on the variation display of the first special symbol The change time from the start until the change display of the first special symbol is stopped, the contents (variation mode) of the change display of the decorative symbols executed by the liquid crystal display device 640 in response to the change display, etc. First special symbol variation pattern selecting means 2564 for selecting a special symbol variation pattern from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in ROM 2504, and first special random number stored in first special symbol hold storage means 2566 The first special symbol display control means 2568 for variably displaying the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1802 and the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 2566 are stored. First special symbol memory number display control means 2570 to be displayed on the first special symbol memory number display 1808 as a number.

  Furthermore, when a detection signal is input to the main control board 1350 from the second start port sensor 1516 by a start winning to the second start port 1506, second special random number generating means 2572 for generating a predetermined second special random number. A second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated by the second special random number generation unit 2572, and a second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 2576. Corresponding to the determination result of the second special symbol per unit determination unit 2575 for determining whether or not to make a hit (small hit, big hit) based on the determination result of the second special symbol per unit determination unit 2575, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol The change time from the start until the change display of the second special symbol is stopped, the content (variation mode) of the change display of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 640 in response to the change display, etc. Second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 2574 for selecting a special symbol variation pattern from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in ROM 2504, and second special random number stored in second special symbol hold storage means 2576 The second special symbol display control means 2578 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1804 based on the second special symbol display unit 2578, and the number of the second special random numbers stored and stored in the second special symbol storage unit 2576 are stored. And a second special symbol memory number display control means 2580 to be displayed on the second special symbol memory number display 1810 as a number.

  The special symbol variation display pattern table stores a plurality of types of special symbol variation patterns according to the variation time and the variation pattern of the decoration symbol executed at the variation time. When the pattern variation mode is different (such as the presence or absence of reach), special symbol variation display patterns corresponding to each variation mode are stored separately. Also, the same is true when the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564 selects the first special symbol variation display pattern and when the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 selects the second special symbol variation display pattern. The special symbol variation display pattern table may be used, or a separate special symbol variation display pattern table (for the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564 to select the first special symbol variation display pattern). A first special symbol variation display pattern table in which a plurality of types of special symbol variation display patterns are used, and a second special symbol variation display pattern selection unit 2574 is used to select a second special symbol variation display pattern; Multiple special symbol variation display patterns stored in the first special symbol variation display pattern table and some Ku may be separately provided with a second special symbol variable display pattern table) in which all different kinds of special symbol variable display pattern is stored.

  In this example, the first special symbol display 1802 by the first special symbol display control means 2568 and the second special symbol display 1804 by the second special symbol display control means 2578 are displayed. When one of the fluctuation display is executed, control is performed so that the other is not executed. Specifically, when the first special symbol display control unit 2568 displays the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 1802 in a variable manner, the second special symbol display control unit 2578 displays the second special symbol display unit 2578. When the second special symbol 1804 is controlled not to be variably displayed and the second special symbol display control means 2578 displays the second special symbol of the second special symbol indicator 1804 variably, the first special symbol is displayed. The display control means 2568 performs control so that the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1802 is not variably displayed. When the first special random number is stored in the first special symbol storage unit 2566 and the second special random number is stored in the second special symbol storage unit 2576, the first special symbol indicator is displayed. It may be controlled to preferentially start either the first special symbol fluctuation display 1802 or the second special symbol fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 1804, or the first special symbol display 1802. The first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol display unit 1804 may display the second special symbol variation display alternately, or the first special symbol variation storage unit 2566 holds the first special symbol variation display. The first special random number (the first special random number, the second special random number) of the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 are first (the oldest generated order). Special) Pattern (First special symbol, the second special symbol) may be executed to change the display of.

  The first special symbol hold storage means 2566 and the second special symbol hold storage means 2576 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 2568 and 2578 are variably displayed. Can not be variably displayed, the first special random number or second special random number generated by the first special random number generator 2562 triggered by the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2152 or the second start port sensor 1516 The second special random number generated by the random number generator 2672 is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four each). The first special symbol storage unit 2566 stores the first special random number in the order of occurrence, and after the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are displayed, the first special symbol changes. When the display can be started, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol hit determining means 2565 is a hit (small hit, big hit) based on the first special random number that is earliest (the oldest generated order). . In addition, the first special symbol hold storage unit 2566 is based on the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 2566 by the first special symbol per unit determination unit 2565 based on the earliest first special random number. After determining whether or not (small hit, big hit), the first special random number can be stored one more by discarding the first special random number. The second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 stores the second special random number in the order of generation, and after the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed, the second special symbol changes. When the display can be started, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol per unit determination means 2575 makes a hit (small hit, big hit) based on the second special random number of the earliest (the oldest generated order). . The second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 is based on the earliest second special random number among the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 by the second special symbol hold determination unit 2575. After determining whether or not (small hit, big hit), the first second special random number is discarded to increase the area in which the second special random number can be stored by one.

  Further, when it is determined that the first special symbol hit judging means 2565 is hit (small hit, big hit) based on the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storing means 2566 on the main control board 1350 or Advantageous game in which the player has an advantage when the second special symbol per unit determination unit 2575 determines that it is a hit (small hit, big hit) based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 2576 Based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating unit 2582 for generating a state and an opening / closing member 1508 for closing the special prize opening 1510 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating unit 2582, the drive control of the attacker solenoid 1514 is performed. A prize winning opening / closing control means 2584.

  Further, the main control board 1350 has a normal lottery result (determination result of the normal symbol per unit determination means 2553 based on the normal random number), a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, and a first special lottery result (first special random number). Based on the first special symbol per unit determination means 2565), the first special symbol variation pattern according to the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result (second special symbol per unit determination unit based on the second special random number) 2575), the second special symbol variation pattern according to the second special lottery result, the number of memories of the first special random number, the number of memories of the second special random number, the number of memories of the ordinary random number, etc. Command generation means 2586 for generating a predetermined control command signal to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, and the command signal generated by the command generation means 2586 to the peripheral control board 2600 A command transmitting unit 2588 for signals, and a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 2600 has a command receiving means 2650 for receiving a control command signal transmitted from the main control board 2500 and an effect corresponding to each of the special symbol variation patterns stored in the ROM 2604 (one to one). Effect pattern selection means 2652 for selecting an effect pattern corresponding to the command signal (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern) received by the command receiving means 2650 from the effect table in which the pattern is set, and the special symbol A plurality of effect tables with different part of the effect pattern set corresponding to the change pattern (all change times are common) (in this example, a table in which only part of the effect pattern is different is used, but all effect patterns are Effect pattern selection means 2652 (which may use a different table). Based on the table setting means 2652a for setting the effect table used for selecting the effect pattern, and the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selecting means 2652, the light emission decoration body 2004 emits light by controlling the light emission drive of each LED 2120. Illumination effect control means 2654 for effecting, effect display control means 2656 for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640, center movable decorative body 2200, side movable decorative body 2300, and under movable decorative body 2400 have predetermined movable effects. Movable control control means 2658 and the like, and production control means 2659 for mainly controlling each of them.

  The peripheral control board 2600 has a center movable decorative body control means 2660 for driving and controlling the center moving motor 2214 and the heel motor 2226 of the center movable decorative body 2200 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658. Side movable decorative body control means 2662 for driving and controlling the side motor 2324 of the side movable decorative body 2300 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658, and an under movable decorative body 2400 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658. Under movable decorative body control means 2664 for driving and controlling the under motor 2412.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 2600, the striking time of the buttocks 2202 according to the operation signal of the operation button 330 according to an instruction from the effect control means 2659 that controls the effect according to the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652. An operation receiving unit 2666 that switches between a state in which movement is possible and a state in which movement is impossible, a counting unit 2666a that counts the number of times the operation button 330 has been operated (the number of times an operation signal has been input; the number of operations), and a counting unit 2666a An operation frequency determination unit 2666b that determines the operation frequency of the operation button 330 according to the counted number of operations, an operation signal of the operation button 330 received by at least the operation reception unit 2666, and a predetermined effect displayed by the effect control unit 2659 Image (for example, specific effect image (hammer chance reach effect image), special effect image (Crocodile panic reach production image), etc.), the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 has the door design T (see FIG. 137) and the crocodile design W (see FIGS. 141 and 142) as the production design. ) Based on the fact that the hit is executed (the fact that the buttocks 2202 has been rotated to the hit position). If it is determined that the strike change means 2668 and the strike determination means 2668 are to strike, the strike is executed. Based on this, it is provided with an impact number counting means 2672 for counting the number of impacts. The number of hits counted by the hit number counting means 2672 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 via the effect control means 2659 or by the effect display control means 2656.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 2600, in accordance with an instruction from the effect control means 2659 based on the selected effect pattern (by control), the batting rotation of the collar 2202 can be performed by the operation accepting means 2666 in accordance with the operation of the operation button 330. When the operation button 330 is operated, an operation lottery means 2673 for lottering a predetermined operation lottery result is further provided. The operation lottery result lottered by the operation lottery means 2673 will be described in detail later, but it is used for hitting judgment by the hitting judgment means 2668 or by the picture changing means 2670 depending on the effect pattern performed by the start winning prize. It is used to change the picture. Further, the hit determination means 2668 includes delay means 2668a that regulates the hitting of the crocodile pattern W or the like by the hook portion 2202 by delaying the driving of the hook portion 2202. As will be described in detail later, the delay means 2668a has a door design T (see FIG. 137) or a crocodile design W as an effect design by the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 based on the strike judgment by the strike judgment means 2668. (Refer to FIG. 141 and FIG. 142).

  In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 has an appearance pattern table changing means for selecting and changing the appearance pattern table from the appearance pattern table selection table (see FIG. 146) according to the number of impacts counted by the impact count counting means 2672. 2676, a display lottery means 2678 for lottering a predetermined display lottery result (predetermined random number value) in accordance with an instruction of the effect control means 2659 based on the selected effect pattern, and a display lottery result lottery and a lottery drawn by the display lottery means 2678 A haunt pattern selecting means 2680 for selecting a predetermined haunt pattern (see FIGS. 148 and 149) from the haunt pattern selection table (see FIG. 147) based on the haunt pattern table selected and changed by the pattern table changing means; Are further provided.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a timer 2682, and the production time and production controlled by the production control means 2659 based on the production pattern selected by the production pattern selection means 2652. It is used for the display time of the image, the variation time of the decorative pattern, the moving timing of the movable decorative body 2006, the operation timing of the operation receiving means 2666, the operation lottery means 2675, the display lottery means 2678, and the like.

  Then, the game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment having the above-described functional configuration will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle unit 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game with a game ball is started by being driven into an upper portion of a game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 599. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left or right side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball flowing down the side surface of the center accessory 1400 passes through the gate portion 1602 of the gate member 1600 disposed on the side surface side of the center accessory 1400 in the game area 605 and is detected by the gate sensor 1612, Based on the detection signal, an ordinary random number is generated in the ordinary random number generation means 2550 on the main control board 1350. Then, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 in the symbol display device 1800 is variably displayed according to the normal lottery result which is the determination result of whether or not the winning by the normal symbol per unit determination means 2553 based on the normal random number (one A normal symbol display 1806 composed of LEDs is alternately lit in red and green, and a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal lottery is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has passed (normal symbol) The display 1806 emits red or green light). The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 2552.

  Specifically, when the normal lottery result by the normal symbol hit determination means 2553 is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 emits green light), and the normal lottery result is “normal”. In the case of a “lost” random number, a stop symbol is displayed with a normal symbol indicating a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1806 emits red light). When the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second starting port 1506 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  Note that the normal symbol fluctuation time (the time from when the normal symbol fluctuation display is started until the normal symbol fluctuation display is stopped) and the expansion time of the movable piece 1504 at the second start port 1506 are first special. It may be changed according to a special lottery result which is a determination result of whether or not to make a hit (small hit, big hit) by the symbol hit determination means 2565 or the second special symbol hit determination means 2575. For example, The special lottery results by the special symbol per unit determination means 2565 or the second special symbol per unit determination unit 2575 are “short per hour (normal per short (2R non-probable large per unit, 5R non-probable large per unit per 15R), high probability per short per unit (2R) In the case of “probable large hits, 5R probable big hits, 15R probable big hits”, etc.), the fluctuation time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table used by the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 2552 can be easily changed by replacing it with a different table and selecting it. In addition, when it is determined that the first special symbol per unit determination means 2565 is 2R big hit (2R non-probable large hit, 2R positive variable big hit), or when the second special symbol per unit determination means 2575 is 2R big hit (2R non-probable large big hit, 2R probable big hit) If it is determined to be 2R big hit, it is normal after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state on condition that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1504 are set to a long time when it is determined that 2R big hit is determined. If the change time of the symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1504 are set to a long time, and it is determined that the 2R big hit is made, the normal symbol change time and the expansion time of the movable piece 1504 are not set to a long time. Without changing the normal symbol fluctuation time and the movable piece 1504 expansion time to a long time after the big hit gaming state, the normal symbol normal fluctuation time and the movable piece normal time are set. It may be set to 拡格 time.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, only the gate member 1600 provided on the left side when viewed from the front is provided with the gate sensor 1612, and even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 1602 of the right gate member 1600. The normal random numbers are not extracted as described above. Therefore, a player who notices that the gate sensor 1612 is not provided on the right gate member 1600 appropriately adjusts the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 1400. Will play games. In other words, if the operation handle portion 461 is turned too far in the clockwise direction, the game ball is strongly driven and flows only on the right side of the center accessory 1400, and the normal lottery based on the detection of the gate sensor 1612 is not performed. Since the opportunity to win a prize at the second starting port 1506 can no longer be obtained, game operations such as strongly driving a game ball into the dark clouds are suppressed, and the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1 is enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  By the way, in this example, the number of normal random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) stored in the normal symbol storage unit 2554 is displayed on the normal symbol storage number display 1812. This normal symbol memory number display 1812 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. When the number of stored data exceeds four, specifically, when the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the normal symbol storage unit 2554 is four, a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 1612. The normal random number generated by the normal random number generation means 2550 based on the above is discarded without being stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 2554.

  The game ball that has flowed down the side surface of the center bonus 1400 is moved toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605 below the center bonus 1400 by an obstacle nail (not shown), a guide shelf 1718 of the side prize opening member 1700, or the like. It is like that. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 1702 disposed below the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2151, the main control board 1350 makes a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage unit 381. To be paid out.

  If a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general prize opening 1702, the first start opening 1502, the second start opening 1506, and the big prize opening 1510, the game area 605 It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 1702, the first starting port 1502, the second starting port 1506, or the big winning port 1510, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  When a game ball flowing down the side surface of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp inlet 1402 opened on the outer peripheral side surface of the center accessory 1400, a ninety-nine fold guide in the frame of the center accessory 1400 is provided via the warp passage 1404. After being supplied to the path 1410, it is supplied to the stage 1406. The ninety-nine fold guide path 1410 can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling while meandering in the front-rear direction, and can reduce the rolling speed (flowing speed) of the game ball and supply it to the stage 1406. It has become. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 1406 first rolls on the first stage 1406a in the stage 1406 in the left-right direction, and then rolls on the second stage 1406b in the left-right direction. The game will be released into the game area 605 below the center bonus 1400. At this time, when a game ball enters the entrance 1414 of the second stage 1406b, it is released into the game area 605 from the discharge port 1416 that opens directly above the first start port 1502 at the center of the lower end of the center accessory 1400. It has become.

  In this example, when a game ball is discharged from the discharge port 1416 of the center accessory 1400 into the game area 605, the first start port 1502 is won with a very high probability, and the game ball is started for the first time. When received by the mouth 1502 and detected by the first starter sensor 2152, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the main control board 1350 and the like. It has become so. It should be noted that a game ball released from the concave groove 1412 of the center accessory 1400 or a game ball flowing down the center accessory 1400 can be awarded to the first start port 1502 with a certain probability. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes the gate member 1600 having the left gate sensor 1612 and based on the normal random number generated by the normal symbol hit determination means 2553, the normal lottery result is determined to be “normal hit”. As described above, when the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second start opening 1506 are spread for a predetermined time and can be awarded, the game ball is received in the second start opening 1506 and the second start is performed. When detected by the mouth sensor 1516, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the storage unit 381 from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 1350 or the like.

  Further, in the main control board 1350, when a game ball wins the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2152 or the second start port sensor 1516, the respective start is performed. A predetermined first special random number or second special random number is generated / extracted according to the mouths 1502 and 1506. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), whether the first special symbol per unit determination means 2565 or the second special symbol per unit determination unit 2575 is a hit (small hit, big hit) If it is determined whether or not the first special symbol display unit 1800 starts the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804, the first special symbol per unit determination means 2565 and the special symbol corresponding to the special lottery result of the second special symbol determination means 2575 (the specific mode corresponding to the special lottery result of the big hit, the special mode corresponding to the special lottery result of the big hit, and the big hit and the small bonus The losing mode corresponding to the losing lottery result is stopped and displayed. In the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (specific mode) suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that opens and closes according to a pattern is generated, and by winning game balls to the big prize opening 1510 during that time, more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 1510, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  The number of first special random numbers (also referred to as storage number) stored in the first special symbol storage unit 2566 is displayed on the first special symbol storage number display 1808 and stored in the second special symbol storage unit 2576. The number of second special random numbers (also referred to as stored numbers) is displayed on the second special symbol stored number display 1810. Each of the first special symbol memory number display 1808 and the second special symbol memory number display 1810 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, specifically, when the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol storage means 2566 is four, it is detected from the first start port sensor 2152. The first special random number generated by the first special random number generation means 2562 based on the input of the signal is discarded without being stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 2566, and the second special symbol hold storage means 2576 is stored. The second special random number generated by the second special random number generator 2572 based on the detection signal input from the second start port sensor 1516 when the number of stored second special random numbers is four. Is discarded without being stored in the second special symbol storage unit 2576.

  In the main control board 1350, the first special random symbol determination means 2565 uses the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2152 as a predetermined random number determination table (first special random number determination table). The second special random number extracted by the second special symbol per-determination means 2575 based on the detection by the second start port sensor 1516, and a predetermined random number determination table (preliminarily determined). The special random number is determined to be “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit” by comparing with the second special symbol random number determination table). 2R jackpot (special symbol hit judging means (first special symbol hit judging means 2565 and second special symbol hit judging means 2575) after the end of the 2R jackpot gaming state) has a normal low probability ( For example, the special symbol hit judging means (the first special symbol hit judging means 2565 and the second special symbol hit judging means 2575) is more than usual after the end of the 2R big odds big hit gaming state. "2R big hit big hit determined with high probability (for example, 1 / 31.5)", "5R big hit (special symbol hit judging means 2565 and second special symbol hit judging means 2565 and second The special symbol per unit determination means 2575) determines that it is a normal low probability (for example, 1/315), and the 5R non-probable large hit, the 5R big hit per game state, the special symbol per unit determination unit (first special symbol per unit determination unit 2565 2R special symbol determination means 2575) 5R probability variation big hit with high probability (for example, 1 / 31.5) that is higher than usual) ”,“ 15R big hit (After the end of the 15R jackpot gaming state, the special symbol hit judging means (the first special symbol hit judging means 2565 and the second special symbol hit judging means 2575) judges that the hit is normal with a low probability (for example, 1/315). After the probability variation big hit and 15R big hit gaming state, the special symbol hit judging means (the first special symbol hit judging means 2565 and the second special symbol hit judging means 2575) have a higher probability (for example, 1 / 31.5) than usual. It is also determined whether it is any one of “15R probability variation big hit determined to hit”.

  Then, when the first special symbol determination means 2565 determines “small hit” based on the first special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 1502 (first special lottery result) Is “small hit”) or when the second special hit determination means 2575 determines “small hit” based on the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the second start port 1506 (When the second special lottery result is “small hit”), the main control board 1350 opens and closes the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). An open / close pattern that closes as an open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) (small hit game).

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol per unit determination means 2565 determines “big hit” based on the extracted first special random number (when the first special lottery result is “big hit”) or the second special random number. When the second special hit determining means 2575 determines “big hit” (when the second special lottery result is “big hit”), the main control board 1350 opens the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500, An opening / closing pattern (open / closed member 1508 is closed when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 1510 with any of the winning conditions. A single opening / closing pattern is called a round, and is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) (big hit gaming state). ) ”, 2 rounds,“ 5R big hit (5R non-probable big hit, 5R positive big hit) ”5 rounds,“ 15R big hit (15R non-probable big hit, 15R positive big hit) ”15 rounds Thus, an advantageous gaming state (2R big hit gaming state, 5R big hit gaming state, 15R big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is generated. Note that, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the “big hit”, the first special hit determination means 2565 based on the extracted first special random number “15R probability variable big hit”, “5R probability variable big hit”, “2R probability big hit” Or when the second special hit determination means 2575 determines that any of “15R-probable big hit”, “5R-probable big hit”, or “2R-probable big hit” is made based on the extracted second special random number. The random number determination table is replaced with a high probability random number determination table (first special symbol high probability random number determination table, second special symbol high probability random number determination table), and based on the extracted first special random number When the first special hit determining means 2565 determines that it is one of “15R non-probable variable big hit”, “5R non-probable big hit”, or “2R non-probable big hit” or extracted If the second special hit judging means 2575 determines that any one of “15R non-probable big hit”, “5R non-probable big hit”, and “2R non-probable big hit” based on the two special random numbers, the random number judgment table has a low probability. It is exchanged for a random number determination table (first special symbol low probability random number determination table, second special symbol low probability random number determination table).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 1808 of the symbol display device 1800 variably displays the first special symbol in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first starting port 1502. In addition to the second special symbol display variably displayed on the second special symbol display 1810 of the symbol display device 1800 in response to the start winning of the game ball at the start port 1506, the liquid crystal display device 640 also displays the first special symbol indicator. In synchronization with the first special symbol fluctuation display 1808 and the second special symbol fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 1810, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment means 2565 and the second special symbol judgment means 2575 ( The effect image according to the special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol indicator 1808 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol indicator 1810 is started, the liquid crystal display device 640 includes a series of different symbols. In the state where multiple decorative symbol columns are displayed (in this example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in three columns), the variation display of each decorative symbol column is started. When the decorative symbol sequence is sequentially stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1808 and the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 1810 is stopped, all the decorative symbol sequences are finally displayed. Stopped display. The determination result of the first special symbol determination means 2565 or the second special symbol determination means 2575 based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state is the game. It has come to be suggested to the people.

Specifically, according to the determination result (special lottery result) of the first special symbol determination unit 2565 and the second special symbol determination unit 2575, a special lottery result is suggested after a plurality of decorative symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner. As an effect image that is stopped and displayed as
1. When the special lottery result is “15R big hit”, the 15R big hit symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed (one of the combinations in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol, will be “15R probable big hit”) In such a case, the 15R probability variable big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and in the case of “15R non-probable big hit”, a 15R non-probable big hit symbol different from the 15R probability variable big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed.
2. The 5R jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed when the special lottery result is “5R jackpot” (one of the combinations in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols have the same symbol is different from the 15R jackpot symbol, (In the case of “5R probability variation big hit”, the 5R probability variation big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and in the case of “5R non-probable variation big hit”, the 5R non-probable variation big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed.)
3. The 2R jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed when the special lottery result is “2R jackpot” (a predetermined symbol (for example, “1”, “3”, and “5”) among the combinations of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) ) (For example, “135”, “153”, “315”, “351”, “513”, “531”, etc.)
4). Small winning symbols (decorated symbols (for example, “1”, “3”, and “5”) among the decorative symbols of left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed when the special lottery result is “small winning” )) (For example, “135”, “153”, “315”, “351”, “513”, “531”, etc.), and combinations of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed with 2R jackpot symbols are small hit symbols. By doing so, it may be difficult to distinguish the 2R big hit symbol from the small hit symbol, and the combination of the decorative symbols different from the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the 2R big hit symbol is used as the small hit symbol. May be)
5. Decorative symbols that are stopped when the special lottery result is “Lose” (A combination of two or more of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols)
One of these is displayed. Since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1808 and 1810, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. You will pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the symbol (for example, the left ornament) which is stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol sequence (for example, the middle ornament symbol) among the left, middle and right ornament symbols. The combination of the symbol and the decorative symbol on the right is the specific condition (reach: In this example, the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. Reach (also called reach state) is the left decorative symbol. And the right decorative design are displayed with the same design stopped, and the middle decorative design has not yet been stopped), and the “reach effect image” is displayed, and the special lottery result is “15R”. “Leach per win” in which a “reach effect image” is displayed in the case of “Big hit” or “5R big hit”, and “Leach loss” in which a “reach effect image” is displayed when the special lottery result is “lost” Executed. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 is directly controlled by the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 131). The symbol fluctuation display on the liquid crystal display device 640 is a special lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600, a special symbol fluctuation pattern (first special symbol fluctuation pattern, second special symbol fluctuation pattern), It is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 based on the normal lottery result and the command signal related to the normal symbol variation pattern. In this way, since the display of the fluctuation of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 or the like, the liquid crystal display apparatus is not increased without increasing the processing load on the main control board 1350. At 640, a more complicated performance can be executed.

  Further, in this example, as an effect pattern indicating an effect pattern of decoration symbols performed on the liquid crystal display device 640, a special symbol variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern) transmitted from the main control board 1350 is used. ) For a certain command signal (special symbol variation pattern indicating the same variation time), a plurality of performance patterns having different performance modes executed by the liquid crystal display device 640 are prepared in advance. Peripheral control board 2600 has a plurality of effect patterns (the same as those prepared in response to command signals related to special symbol fluctuation patterns (first special symbol fluctuation pattern, second special symbol fluctuation pattern) received from main control board 1350. One of the plurality of effect patterns indicating the change time) is selected, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is controlled based on the selected effect pattern, thereby executing the change display of the decorative symbols. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 1350 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  Then, the reach development effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated concretely. This reach development effect is a special lottery based on the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 and a predetermined random number determination table. When the result is “15R big hit” or “5R big hit”, the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means (first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 2564, second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 2574) is “per reach” and reach development effect Special symbol variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern) is selected, or special lottery pattern selection means (first special symbol variation pattern) Special symbol variation pattern (first special pattern) in which the selection means 2564 and the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574) perform reach development effects. Pattern variation pattern, a production which is executed when selecting the second special symbol variation pattern).

  In the main control board 1350 of this example, when the special symbol variation pattern selection means (the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564, the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574) selects the special symbol variation pattern that performs the reach development effect, The variable time of the length corresponding to the reach development effect is selected and the special symbol is variably displayed, and a command signal for performing the reach development effect is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600. Then, when the peripheral control board 2600 receives a command signal for performing the reach development effect, the peripheral control board 2600 obtains a predetermined effect random number and uses the effect random number and the predetermined determination table to generate the reach development effect image. The reach development effect image is selected and displayed, and the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 of the back unit 2000 are caused to emit light effect and movable effect so as to correspond to the reach development effect image. That is, the reach development effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 640, and the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1802, second special symbol display 1804) executes the reach development effect and the reach development effect. The normal fluctuation display common to the case where it does not do is performed.

  As an example of this reach development effect, the symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are in the reach state (in this example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped together with the same design, and the middle decorative design is still stopped. When the side decorative members 2302 of the left and right side movable decorative bodies 2300 located at the approach positions close to each other are moved to the separated positions separated from each other, the reach development effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. It is displayed (see FIG. 136). Accordingly, after the reach state is reached, the side decoration member 2302 moves to the separation position, so that the viewing range of the display screen that can be viewed from the player side is expanded in the left-right direction, and the display screen is widened. However, it is possible to expect an effect that enhances the interest by having a sense of expectation that it may be a “big hit”. In addition, since the reach development effect image is displayed on a large screen, it is possible to enhance the sense of reality for the effect image, and to entertain the effect image and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game. ing.

  In this embodiment, as another example of the reach development effect, a reach development effect called “hammer chance reach” (hereinafter simply referred to as “hammer chance”) can be performed. When the symbol variably displayed on the display device 640 is in a reach state, the peripheral control board 2600 prompts the player to repeatedly press the operation button 330 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 instead of the decorative symbol variation display. The guidance is displayed, and the double door opening T is displayed (see FIG. 137 (a)). Subsequently, when the peripheral control board 2600 allows the batting section 2202 to be turned in response to the operation of the operation button 330 disposed on the front surface of the door frame 5, when the player operates the operation button 330 in this state. In addition, an image is displayed such that the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 strikes and rotates so as to strike the door pattern T, and the door pattern T displayed as the collar 2202 strikes and rotates is opened. (See FIG. 137 (a)). In addition, the presence of the door pattern in which the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 vibrates in the left-right direction and the moving image is displayed as it opens is further enhanced with the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202. It has become.

  In this reach development effect, the player operates the operation button 330 for a predetermined time, and the effect is performed so that the door design is opened by hitting the door design T with the buttocks 2202 and the operation button 330 is operated. Thus, the interest of the player can be enhanced by whether or not the door pattern T can be opened. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202 is made impossible according to the operation of the operation button 330, and if the special random number related to this effect is “big hit”, the door design T is The game is in an open state (see FIG. 137 (c)), a display that suggests “big hit” is made, and after the reach development effect is finished, the “big hit” game is started. On the other hand, if the special random number related to this effect is “losing”, a display suggesting “losing” is made with the symbol door closed, and the reach development effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the start of “hammer chance” is instructed as the reach development effect based on the instruction from the effect control means 2659, the reach development effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 via the effect display control means 2656. Display of the specific effect image (hammer chance effect image) is started. In this hammer chance effect image, as shown in FIG. 137, the door pattern T is displayed instead of the decorative pattern variation display, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, about 15 seconds). Is displayed.

  When the display of the hammer chance effect image is started on the liquid crystal display device 640, the door pattern T is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (A) until a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) elapses from the beginning. When the display mode is “fully closed” and a predetermined time has elapsed, the door symbol T is changed to a slightly opened display mode (display mode “open small”) and the operation receiving unit 2666 operates the operation button 330. Accordingly, the striking rotation of the flange portion 2202 is made possible. In this state, the lottery by the operation lottery means 2675 is not performed, and even if the operation button 330 is operated and the door design T is hit by the buttocks 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200, the door design is changed by the picture change means 2670. The display mode of T is not changed (changed). Even in this state, when the operation button 330 is operated to hit the door design T with the collar portion 2202, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 vibrates in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. At the same time, a moving image with a feeling that the door pattern T swings and opens is displayed.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) elapses after the operation receiving unit 2666 enables the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202 in accordance with the operation of the operation button 330, an operation lottery is performed according to an instruction from the effect control unit 2659. The operation lottery at the means 2673 is performed, and by operating the operation button 330, the operation lottery is performed simultaneously with the striking rotation of the buttock 2202, and when the result of the operation lottery is won, the design changing means 2670 The pattern T is changed from the “open small” display mode to the “open” display mode. When the display mode of the door picture T is changed by the picture changing means, the effect control means 2659 allows the operation button 330 to be operated by the operation accepting means 2666 for a predetermined short time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Accordingly, the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202 is made impossible. As a result, the display mode of the door design T is continuously changed in a short time to prevent the individual display mode from being difficult to recognize, and the display mode of the door design T is completely changed at an early stage. Therefore, it can be prevented from becoming “fully open”.

  In this “hammer chance”, the door design T is struck by the heel portion 2202 by the operation of the operation button 330, and every time the operation lottery selected by the operation lottery means 2673 is won by the operation of the operation button 330, The display mode changes from “open small” to “open”, from “open” to “open large”, and further from “open large” to “full open”. By gradually changing the degree of opening, it is possible to heighten the expectation of “big hit” and to suppress the interest in games.

  In this “hammer chance”, as shown in FIG. 139, the operation lottery probability that the winning lottery is selected by the operation lottery means 2673 by the effect control means 2659 is varied according to the display mode of the door picture T. Specifically, when the display pattern of the door pattern T is “open small”, the winning probability is 1/3, when “opening”, the winning probability is 1/5, and “open large”. The winning probability is 1/5, and the more the door picture T is opened, the harder it is to win.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 7 seconds) has elapsed after the operation control lottery 2647 is enabled by the operation control lottery 2659 by the effect control unit 2659, the operation lottery in the operation lottery unit 2673 is stopped, and the operation receiving unit When a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) elapses after the hitting rotation of the collar portion 2202 is enabled according to the operation of the operation button 330 by 2666, the operation accepting means 2666 causes the habit according to the operation of the operation button 330. After the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 4 seconds) has elapsed after that, the hammer chance effect image display is terminated and returned to the decorative symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 138, the operation button 330 is operated during the operation receivable time range (corresponding to the first time range of the present invention) during the display time with respect to the display time of the hammer chance effect image. Accordingly, the strut 2202 can be rotated by striking, and the operation lottery is performed by operating the operation button 330 during the lotterable time range (corresponding to the second time range of the present invention) in the operation acceptable time range. When the operation button 330 is operated during the operation receivable time range, the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 strikes the door pattern T, and the operation button 330 is pressed during the lottery time range. When operated, the buttock 2202 strikes the door pattern T and performs an operation lottery. When the operation lottery is won, the display mode of the door pattern T is changed to a display mode opened one step.

  In this “hammer chance”, when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the start winning is “15R big hit” or “5R big hit”, the production control means 2659 can accept the operation. If the display pattern of the door symbol T is “open” or “full open” at the end of the time range, the display pattern of the door symbol T is displayed as “fully open” and the display of the hammer chance effect image is terminated. If the display mode of the door symbol T is “open small” or “opening” at the end of the operation receivable time range, the display mode of the door symbol T is once set to “fully closed”. "Half open" is displayed, and the display of the hammer chance effect image is terminated. As a result, the “Hammer Chance” ends when the door design T is “fully open”, so that it feels like the game by the operation of the operation button 330 has been cleared, and the “big hit” game generated thereafter is interesting. It can be enhanced.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) is “15R big hit” or “5R big hit” and “Hammer Chance” ends, then a liquid crystal display is provided as an effect image On the device 640, an effect image (dungeon mode) that intrudes into the underground labyrinth is displayed, and a special lottery result (No. 1 special lottery result, 2nd special lottery result).

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the start winning is “losing”, the production control means 2659 changes the display mode of the door pattern T when the operation acceptable time range ends. The display mode of “Half Closed” is changed to end the display of the hammer chance effect image. As a result, the “Hammer Chance” ends when the door pattern T is “fully closed”, so the game by the operation of the operation button 330 cannot be cleared, and the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) It is possible to make the player recognize that is a “losing”.

  As described above, in the reach development effect described above, the collar 2202 can be struck and rotated according to the operation of the operation button 330, and the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is operated by the operation of the operation button 330. Compared with the case where a hammer is displayed on the display screen as a simple design, the three-dimensional collar 2202 actually moves and hits the door design T, so that a sense of reality is enhanced and the player's interest Can be enhanced and entertained, and interest can be further enhanced.

  The reach development effects include various effect patterns other than the effect patterns described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the under decorative member 2402 of the under movable decorative body 2400 is raised, and a predetermined design (for example, a waveform design) is displayed on the rear side of the window 2408a in the liquid crystal display device 640. Further, it may be possible to increase the sense of expectation for “big hit” by suggesting the possibility of “big hit” depending on the color, size, movement, etc. of the symbol. As an effect using the under movable decorative body 2400, in addition to the reach development effect, the same effect may be performed during the variable display of symbols.

  In addition to the above, the reach development effect is omitted in addition to the above, but as an effect of finalizing the last symbol after reaching reach on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, In the state where the symbols are displayed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, by hitting with the collar 2202 of the front symbol center movable decorative body 2200, the symbols on the near side are destroyed so that the symbols on the rear side appear. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect in which even the symbol that becomes “big hit” is destroyed by the buttocks 2202.

  In addition, when the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols suggesting “big hit”, a movable effect is performed in which these decorative symbols are hit by the buttocks 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200, and An image effect may be provided in which the struck decorative pattern is displayed so as to fly backward, thereby making it possible to entertain the movement of the collar 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 and to “big hit”. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the game will be started and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition to the above, as a reach development effect, a reach development effect called “crocodile panic reach” (hereinafter simply referred to as “crocodile panic”) shown in FIGS. 141 to 150 can be performed. ing. The “crocodile panic” is controlled by the effect control means 2659 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652, and the first special symbol display 1802 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation) transmitted from the command transmission means 2588 when starting or when the second special symbol display 1804 starts the variation display of the second special symbol. Pattern) and special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the like. In response to the command receiving means 2650 receiving the command signal, the effect pattern selecting means 2652 displays the effect pattern stored in the ROM 2604. The effect display control means 2656 displays the liquid crystal display device 640 according to the selected effect pattern. The first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 from the time when the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started (when the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started). Is stopped or when the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1804 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol transmitted from the command transmission means 2588 is stopped. The effect display control means 2656 displays the liquid crystal display device 640 in response to the command receiving means 2650 receiving a command signal including a message indicating that the command receiving means 2650 has received the command signal. 1 until control stops and all decorative symbols are stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) Fluctuation of times 141 and 142, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is replaced with the decorative symbol variation display (the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed or the decorative symbol is displayed in the liquid crystal display). Anything that makes the display of the decorative symbols inconspicuous, such as a reduced display on the edge of the display device 640 (for example, the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 640) may be used. Positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, and a special effect image in which the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears at the appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3, and each of the operation buttons 330 arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 is displayed. The operation buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c are operated to hit the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears with the heel part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200, and the crocodile pattern W that appears at the heel part 2202 is hit. Then, the points are added, and the game performance is such that the number of crocodile patterns W can be struck for a predetermined time.

  In addition, in this “crocodile crocodile panic”, a target of 20 hits is set as the number of crocodile patterns W to be hit, and when the hit of the target number is successful (clear), an effect that becomes a “big hit” is made. Is. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, the display time of “crocodile panic” is divided into two parts, the first half and the second half. There are a plurality of crocodile patterns W within an operation receivable time range (for example, the first half is about 14 seconds and the second half is about 15 seconds) in which the hitting rotation of the collar portion 2202 according to the operation of the operation button 330 can be performed by the means 2666. (For example, 29 to 35) It appears to appear. Thereby, the motivation to the second half is heightened by the number of crocodile patterns W hit in the first half. In the latter half of the display time, the operation receivable time range is further divided into three time ranges of A cut, B cut, and C cut (for example, about 5 seconds each).

  Further, the production contents of “crocodile panic” will be described in detail. When the production pattern indicating that “crocodile panic” is performed is selected by the production pattern selection unit 2652 based on the command signal from the main control board 1350, the production control unit 2659. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 640 is caused to start displaying the first half of the crocodile panic effect image as the special effect image via the effect display control means 2656. When the display of the effect image in the first half is started, three appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 arranged in the left-right direction are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 141 (a)) and the appearance position. There is a guidance (display or voice guidance) that prompts the user to operate one of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in the operation button 330 so that the crocodile pattern W appearing in Z1, Z2, and Z3 is hit with the buttocks 2202 Made.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the first half effect image is started, the operation accepting unit 2666 operates the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in response to an instruction from the effect control unit 2659. Accordingly, the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202 is made possible, and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears from the predetermined appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 according to the appearance pattern for the first half. As shown in FIG. 144, the crocodile pattern W appears from the lower side toward the upper side where the collar portion 2202 is disposed, and the crocodile pattern W exceeds the line β, as shown in FIG. 144. When the crocodile pattern W rises (advances) and crosses the line α, the crocodile pattern W opens and bites, and then moves backward and sinks. It is a kind of movement.

  By the way, in the effect control means 2659, prior to displaying the effect image of the first half, one appearance pattern is selected from the plurality of appearance patterns for the first half stored in the ROM 2604 in advance, and the crocodile pattern that appears based on the appearance pattern is displayed. W position, speed, amount of appearance, etc. are controlled. As shown in an example in FIG. 145, the first half of the haunt pattern divides the operation acceptable time range of the first half into 14 stages (for example, 1 stage is about 1 second), and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears at each stage. Positions Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the speed and amount of appearing and appearing are determined, and a plurality of types (for example, 8 types) of appearing patterns are prepared in advance. In this first half infestation pattern, 14 crocodile patterns W appear and appear, and the appearance speed of the crocodile pattern W that appears is only low speed or medium speed. The crocodile pattern W can be hit.

  The crocodile pattern W has a low speed (for example, 1.0 seconds for appearance, 0.5 seconds for backward movement), a medium speed (for example, 0.8 seconds for appearance, 0.4 seconds for backward movement), and a high speed (for example, Appearance is possible at any of the three appearance speeds of 0.5 seconds for appearance and 0.2 seconds for receding. In FIG. 145, “Fake” means that the amount of appearance of the crocodile pattern W is small (for example, in FIG. 144, the crocodile pattern W moves backward immediately beyond the line β).

  When the player operates one of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c with respect to the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears in a predetermined appearance pattern, the operation button 330a and the operation button 330a and the operation part 330a and the center movable decorative body 2200 are operated. 330b, 330c and corresponding appearance positions Z1, Z2, Z3 are moved and rotated. The operation of the center movable decorative body 2200 will be described in detail. When the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c are operated, the operated operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c are operated from the movable effect control means 2658 via the center movable decorative body control means 2660. When the center moving motor 2214 is driven by outputting a driving signal for instructing the movement of the sliding body 2222 in the direction (corresponding position) corresponding to 330b, 330c to the center moving motor 2214, the flange 2202 A drive signal for instructing to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is output to the heel motor 2226 to drive the heel motor 2226. Further, after the sliding body 2222 is moved to a predetermined position on the left and right by driving the center driving motor 2214, the sliding body 2222 is substantially moved in the left-right direction via the center movable decoration body control means 2660. A drive signal instructing movement of the sliding body 2222 to the center position is output to the center moving motor 2214. That is, after the sliding body 2222 is moved to a predetermined position on the left and right and the hit by the flange portion 2202 is performed, the center moving motor 2214 is driven in reverse to return the sliding body 2222 to the substantially central position in the left and right direction. Stop in the state. Further, by driving the heel motor 2226 to rotate the heel portion 2202 in the direction of hitting the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, the movable effect control means 2658 passes through the center movable decorative body control means 2660. A drive signal for instructing rotation of the portion 2202 to the raising position is output to the heel motor 2226. That is, after the collar portion 2202 is rotated to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, the collar motor 2226 is driven in reverse to stop the collar portion 2202 in the state where it is returned to the swinging position. The center movable decorative body 2200 is driven substantially simultaneously from the movement of the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction to the return to the center, the rotation of the collar 2202 to the striking position, and the return to the swing-up position. In addition, the trajectory of the buttock 2202 appears to rotate diagonally, and the striking action of the buttock 2202 is faster than when each movement is executed in turn. It has become.

  When the intermediate operation button 330b is operated, the drive signal that instructs the center drive motor 2214 to move the slide body 2222 is not output from the movable effect control means 2658 to the center drive decorative body control means 2660. Only the drive signal instructing to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 by the flange 2202 is output. That is, when the center operation button 330b is operated, the center moving motor 2214 is not driven, only the heel motor 2226 is driven, and only the heel portion 2202 is blown while the sliding body 2222 is positioned substantially at the center. It is designed to return to the swinging position after turning. Further, while the center moving motor 2214 and the heel motor 2226 are being driven, that is, until the sliding body 2222 returns to the center position and the heel section 2202 returns to the swing-up position, the heel section is operated according to the operation of the operation button 330. The batting rotation of 2202 is made impossible, and the batting position cannot be changed by the collar portion 2202 until the center movable decorative body 2200 finishes one operation by the operation of the operation button 330. Accordingly, if the operation position of the operation button 330 is wrong with respect to the appearance position of the crocodile pattern W, there is a high possibility that the desired crocodile pattern W will be missed (see FIG. 141 (C)). More accurate operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c can be requested.

  On the other hand, with respect to the striking rotation of the buttock 2202 due to the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, the striking determination means 2668 determines whether or not the striking buttock 2202 strikes the crocodile pattern W. It has become. The hitting determination of the crocodile pattern W by the buttock 2202 is based on the number of hits counted by the hit count counting means 2672 and the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) that the operation lottery means 2673 draws. The operation lottery result indicating whether or not to allow the crocodile pattern W to be hit by the buttocks 2202 and the position and operation timing of the operation buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c in the operation button 330 to be operated with respect to the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears. Based on the hit possibility determination result as to whether or not the crocodile pattern W can be hit with the buttocks 2202, it is executed by the hit determination means 2668. The hit determination means 2668 obtains an operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the heel part 2202 is permitted by lottery of the operation lottery means 2675, and the position and operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c in the operation button 330 It is determined that the crocodile pattern W is to be hit when a hit possibility determination result indicating that the crocodile pattern W appearing at the timing can be hit is obtained, and the operation lottery result and the crocodile pattern to allow the crocodile pattern W to be hit. When only one of the determination results indicating that W can be hit is obtained, it is determined that the crocodile pattern W is not hit.

  Specifically, after the operation button 330 is operated, the sliding body 2222 is moved to a predetermined position on the left and right, and the time until the collar portion 2202 is rotated to the striking position at the predetermined position is about 0.5 seconds. It takes about 0.7 seconds from the start of the appearance of the pattern W until it moves to a position where it can be hit by the collar 2202 (position beyond the line β in FIG. 144), and the appearance of the crocodile pattern W starts. If the time from when the crocodile 2202 is hit by the buttocks 2202 until it moves to a position where it cannot be hit is about 1.0 second, about 0.2 seconds to 0. When the corresponding operation button 330 is operated at a timing within a time range of 5 seconds, it is determined that the crocodile pattern W can be hit. In this case, if the operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is permitted is obtained by the lottery of the operation lottery means 2675, the hit determining means 2668 determines that the crocodile pattern W is hit, and the sliding body The crocodile pattern W2 and the crocodile pattern W overlapped with the crocodile pattern W by striking and rotating the buttock part 2202 to the striking position by moving the 2222 to a predetermined position on the left and right and rotating the collar part 2202 to the striking position at the predetermined position. It becomes like this. In addition, the timing for determining the hit | damage mentioned above becomes a numerical value which changes with the appearance speed of the crocodile pattern W.

  Further, in the “crocodile crocodile panic”, the operation lottery means 2673 draws lots based on the winning probability selection table shown in FIG. The winning probability selection table includes the A pattern selected when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the start winning is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit”, and the special by the start winning The lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is composed of B pattern selected when “losing”, “small hit” or “2R big hit”, and the number of crocodile pattern W hits, respectively The winning probability is set according to (the number of hits counted by the hit number counting means 2672). 150. The A pattern and B pattern of the winning probability selection table shown in FIG. 150 allow 100% of the crocodile pattern W to be struck in the lottery executed by the operation lottery means 2674 until the number of hits is 16, respectively. An operation lottery result is obtained. In addition, as described above, in this example, 14 crocodile patterns W appear and appear in the appearance pattern for the first half of “crocodile panic”. Therefore, in the first half of the “crocodile crocodile panic”, an operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttock 2202 is allowed at a rate of 100% in the lottery executed by the operation lottery means 2673 is obtained. .

  If the hit determining means 2668 determines to hit the crocodile pattern W by operating the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, the crocodile pattern W is rotated by the pattern changing means 2670 when the collar 2202 is rotated to the hit position. Is changed to the crocodile pattern W ′ that has been hit (see FIGS. 142D and 142E), and a sound “It!” Is emitted from the speaker 163, and the crocodile pattern W is given to the player. It is possible to visually recognize that is hit with the buttocks 2202. Further, when it is determined that the crocodile pattern W is to be struck by the butt portion 2202 in the hit determining means 2668, the crocodile pattern W is changed to the struck crocodile pattern W ′ by rotating the heel portion 2202 to the striking position. In addition, one hit number is added by the hit number counting means 2672, and although not shown, an “x” mark is displayed on one of the 20 crocodile images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, and the player The number of crocodile patterns W that have been struck and the number of remaining crocodile patterns W until the target number of strokes are successfully (cleared) can be known.

  In this way, the display of the first half effect image in “crocodile crocodile panic” proceeds, and the player performs a batting game in which the crocodile pattern W is hit. When is finished, after the comment corresponding to the number of strikes of the crocodile pattern W that has been hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the display of the latter-stage effect image is started.

  In the latter half of the “crocodile panic”, the operation acceptance time range is divided into three cuts, and before the start of the display of each cut, the appearance pattern table changing means 2676 counts by the hit number counting means 2672 until then. Based on the number of hits and a predetermined appearance pattern table selection table (see FIG. 146) stored in advance in the ROM 2604, one of the appearance pattern tables from the pattern A to the pattern N is selected, and the appearance pattern selection is performed. It is changed to the appearance pattern table used by the means 2680. Then, based on the appearance pattern table selected / changed by the appearance pattern table changing means 2676, the display lottery means 2678, and the appearance pattern selection table stored in advance in the ROM 2604 (see FIG. 147), the appearance pattern selection means In 2680, a predetermined second-half appearance pattern (see FIGS. 148 and 149) is selected, and the crocodile pattern W is displayed in response to the selected appearance pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the appearance pattern for the latter half divides the display time of each cut into five stages (for example, one stage is about 1 second), and the appearance position of the crocodile pattern W at each stage. Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the speed and amount of appearing and appearing are determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the crocodile patterns PTN1 to PTN3 are substantially cut by one crocodile pattern W at any one of the climax positions Z1, Z2 and Z3. The crocodile pattern W is made to appear repeatedly during the period (for example, for 4.2 seconds), and the crocodile pattern W is continuously hit by the player. In this pattern, if the crocodile pattern W is struck six times, it is not counted as the number of strucks even if struck further. In addition, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the in / out patterns PTN4 to PTN6 cause 3 to 4 crocodile patterns W to appear at low speed and 1 to 2 crocodile patterns W to be in the middle. It is designed to appear at high speed, and it has a very difficult appearance pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), examples of the appearance patterns PTN7 to PTN12 are obtained by making one crocodile pattern W appear at high speed or high speed fake, and about 4 crocodiles in one cut. The pattern W can be struck, and the pattern has a low difficulty level. In addition, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), the appearance patterns PTN13 to PTN18 cause the three crocodile patterns W to appear at low speed or medium speed, and two to three crocodile patterns W are displayed. It is made to appear at high speed or high speed fake, and it is possible to hit about 3 crocodile patterns W in one cut, and it has a moderate appearance level.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), the appearance patterns PTN19 to PTN24 are about 2 in one cut by causing two or three crocodile patterns W to appear at low speed or medium speed. The crocodile pattern W can be struck, and it is a haunting pattern with high difficulty. In addition, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), an example of the appearance pattern PTN25, the appearance patterns PTN25 to PTN30 cause one crocodile pattern W to appear at low speed or medium speed, and about one crocodile pattern per cut. It is designed to be able to strike W, and has a haunting pattern with extremely high difficulty. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), the appearance patterns PTN31 to PTN36 cause 2 to 4 crocodile patterns W to appear at high speed, and the remaining crocodile patterns W are set to medium speed fake or high speed. It is a haunting pattern in which no crocodile pattern W can be struck by fake.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the appearance pattern table selection table used by the appearance pattern table changing means 2676 is such that the pattern table pattern I is selected when the number of crocodile patterns W is hit, As shown in FIG. 147, pattern I of the pattern table can be selected only from one of the appearance patterns PTN31 to PTN36 among the appearance patterns for the latter half. The crocodile pattern W that appears in the street cannot be hit. That is, the higher the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W, the more difficult the haunting pattern is selected, and the target number of crocodile patterns W (20) is successfully hit (the hit game is cleared). It has become difficult.

  In the latter half of the effect image, by changing the operation lottery probability to be won in the operation lottery by the operation lottery means 2673 according to the number of hitting crocodile patterns W, the target number (20) of crocodile designs W "Alligator panic" is controlled so that it is almost impossible to succeed. Specifically, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the start winning is “losing”, “small hit”, or “2R big hit”, the operation button 330 is used as a special effect specification. When the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are operated, the operation lottery means 2673 draws with the winning probability corresponding to the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W based on the B pattern of the operation lottery probability selection table, and the number of hits is 17 or more. Then, an operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttock 2202 is not allowed is obtained at a rate of 100%. Further, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the start winning prize is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit”, the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c in the operation button 330 are used as special effect specifications. Is operated, the operation lottery means 2674 draws with the winning probability according to the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W based on the A pattern of the operation lottery probability selection table, and when the number of hits is 17 and 18, the ratio is 25%. The operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is permitted (the operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is not allowed at a rate of 75%) is 50% when the number of hits is 19. The operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is permitted at a ratio (The operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is not allowed at a ratio of So that can be obtained.

  Further, when the operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttock 2202 is not permitted is obtained by the lottery by the operation lottery means 2673, the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c in the operation button 330 are obtained by the batting determination means 2668. When the hit possibility determination result indicating that the crocodile pattern W appearing and dropping can be hit according to the position and the operation timing is obtained, the hitting position is rotated by delaying the driving of the collar portion 2202 by the delay means 2668a. The heel part 2202 and the crocodile pattern W are restricted from overlapping, and the crocodile pattern W is controlled so as not to be hit. Specifically, when the driving of the collar 2202 is not delayed by the delay unit 2668a, immediately after the determination by the hit determination unit 2668 is made based on the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in the operation button 330 being performed. While outputting a drive signal instructing movement of the sliding body 2222 to the center moving motor 2214 and a drive signal instructing striking of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 by the eaves part 2202 to the eaves motor 2226, a delay means 2668 is output. When the driving of the collar unit 2202 is delayed by the hit judgment means 2668 based on the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c of the operation button 330 being performed, the driving of the collar unit 2202 is not delayed. Compared to the motor 2214 for moving the center Delay the output timing of the drive signal instructing the movement of the sliding body 2222 and the drive signal instructing striking of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 by the collar 2202 to the collar motor 2226 by a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds). Thus, the time until the collar 2202 is changed to the striking position is delayed as compared with the case where the driving of the collar 2202 is not delayed.

  Thereby, when the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are operated aiming at the appearing crocodile pattern W, the position where the crocodile pattern W can be struck from the position where the crocodile pattern W can be struck before the hook part 2202 rotates to the struck position. Control is performed so that the crocodile pattern W is missed. For example, after the operation button 330 is operated, the sliding body 2222 is moved to a predetermined position on the left and right, and the time until the hook 2202 is rotated to the striking position at the predetermined position is about 0.5 seconds. It takes about 0.4 seconds from the start of appearance until it moves to a position where it can be struck by the heel part 2202 (position beyond the line β in FIG. 144), and after the crocodile pattern W starts to appear, the buttock If the time required to move to a position where it is not possible to hit after about 220 seconds is set to about 0.8 seconds, the crocodile pattern W starts to appear when the delay means 2668a does not delay the driving of the collar 2202 If the corresponding operation button 330 is operated within about 0.3 seconds from the start, it is determined that the crocodile pattern W can be hit. Further, since the human reaction speed is around 0.2 seconds, the operation button 330 is operated around 0.4 seconds after the appearance of the crocodile pattern W by delaying the driving of the heel part 2202 by 0.2 seconds. After the crocodile pattern W moves from a position where it can be struck to a position where it cannot be struck, the collar 2202 is rotated to the struck position. In this way, by delaying the driving of the hook 2202 by the delay means 2668a, it is controlled that the hook 2202 rotated to the hitting position and the crocodile pattern W are overlapped, and the crocodile pattern W is missed. Therefore, it is determined that the crocodile pattern W that has appeared in spite of overlapping the crocodile pattern 2202 that has been rotated to the striking position and the crocodile pattern W has not been hit, that is, the groin that has been rotated to the striking position. The number of crocodile patterns W hit is not increased in spite of the overlap between 2202 and the crocodile pattern W (“X” is not displayed on one of the 20 crocodile patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640). The player's distrust is not increased. In this example, the sliding body 2222 to the center moving motor 2214 is compared with the case where the driving of the hook portion 2202 is not delayed in order to avoid the overlap of the hook portion 2202 hitting and turning to the hitting position and the crocodile pattern W. The output timing of the drive signal for instructing the movement of the liquid crystal display device 640 by the eaves part 2202 to the eaves motor 2226 and the output timing of the drive signal for instructing the movement of the eaves motor 2226 are delayed by a very short time of about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to realize that the driving of the buttocks 2202 has been delayed.

  In this example, the operation lottery means 2673 makes a lottery indicating that the crocodile pattern W of the buttock 2202 is not allowed to be hit, and the hit determination means 2668 determines the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c on the operation button 330 according to the position and operation timing. When a hitting possibility determination result indicating that the crocodile pattern W that appears and that can be hit is obtained, the crocodile part 2202 and the crocodile pattern rotated to the striking position even if the driving of the hook part 2202 by the delay means 2668a is delayed. If it is determined that overlapping with W cannot be avoided, the crocodile pattern 2202 rotated to the striking position and the crocodile pattern W overlap even if the effect control means 2659 delays the driving of the heel part 2202 by the delay means 2668a. The appearance of the crocodile pattern W judged to be unavoidable (low speed, medium speed, high speed, medium speed fake, high speed Eiku, and battered) and is displayed by the effect display control unit 2656 to change the avoidable retractable manner that the overlap and the hammer portion 2202 and crocodile pattern W which has rotated in the striking position. For example, the crocodile pattern W 202 and the crocodile pattern W are prevented from overlapping by changing the crocodile pattern W appearing at low speed and displaying it at a high speed. Thus, when the operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the heel part 2202 is not permitted is obtained by the lottery by the operation lottery means 2673, it is surely avoided that the heel part 2202 and the crocodile pattern W overlap. It has been determined that the crocodile pattern W that has appeared in spite of overlapping the heel part 2202 and the crocodile pattern W that have been rotated to the striking position has not been hit, that is, has been rotated to the striking position. Despite the overlap of the buttock 2202 and the crocodile pattern W, the number of crocodile patterns W hit is not increased (“×” is displayed on one of the 20 crocodile patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640) Does not increase the distrust of the player. Further, when the operation lottery means 2673 makes a lottery indicating that the crocodile pattern W is not allowed to hit the crocodile part 2202, the delay part 2668a drives the heel part 2202 without changing the appearance of the crocodile pattern W. Only when it is determined that it is unavoidable that the crocodile pattern W rotated to the striking position and the crocodile pattern W overlap each other even if the crocodile pattern W is delayed, the crocodile pattern W has been changed to the striking position by changing the appearance mode In order to avoid overlapping with the crocodile pattern W, it is difficult to realize that the appearance of the crocodile pattern W is changed based on a predetermined result (so-called race).

  The lottery means 2673 makes a lottery indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W on the collar 2202 is not allowed, and the hitting judgment means 2668 shows a crocodile that appears depending on the position and operation timing of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c in the operation button 330. When the hit possibility determination result indicating that the pattern W can be hit is obtained, the hook 2202 and the crocodile pattern W rotated to the hitting position even if the driving of the hook 2202 by the delay means 2668a is delayed. Not only when it is determined that the overlap cannot be avoided, but also the control of the effect control means 2659 delaying the driving of the collar unit 2202 by the delay means 2668a and the crocodile pattern W determined that the overlap of the crocodile pattern W cannot be avoided. Appearance mode (low speed, medium speed, high speed, medium speed fake, high speed fake, and continuous hit), hit position Intrusion mode that can avoid overlapping of the rotated heel part 2202 and the crocodile pattern W (for example, an indentation mode in which the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears at a speed different from the speed at which the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears in the running appearance mode) The speed of the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears at a low speed may be changed to a high speed and the like, and the display may be performed by the effect display control means 2656. Accordingly, only one of the control for delaying the driving of the buttock 2202 and the control for changing the appearance and appearance of the crocodile pattern W (low speed, medium speed, high speed, medium speed fake, high speed fake, and continuous hitting) is executed. Compared to the case, the time for delaying the driving of the heel part 2202 can be reduced, and the appearance of the crocodile pattern does not need to be changed to a different appearance state where the speed of appearance of the crocodile is extremely different. It is difficult to realize that the overlap has been avoided and it is difficult to realize that the appearance of the crocodile pattern W is changed based on a predetermined result (so-called race). This makes it difficult to realize that “crocodile panic” is executed based on a predetermined result, and does not lower the expectation for the operation of the operation button 330 when “crocodile panic” is executed.

  Then, when the effect control as described above is performed and the operation receivable time range in the latter half of the effect image ends, the operation receiving means 2666 performs the batting rotation of the collar portion 2202 according to the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c. Although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 640 displays a large crocodile pattern as a boss crocodile, displays a comment corresponding to the number of hits, ends the “crocodile crocodile panic”, and changes the decorative pattern. Return to display. The special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit” and “crocodile panic” is executed and 20 crocodile patterns W are successfully hit (clear) In such a case, the center movable decorative body 2200 is displayed after displaying a comment indicating that the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W has reached the target number (20) (the fact that “crocodile crocodile panic” has been cleared) as a comment corresponding to the number of hits. The buttock part 2202 moves, hits and destroys the boss crocodile, ends the "crocodile crocodile panic", stops and displays the big hit symbol (5R big hit symbol, 15R big hit symbol) in the decorative symbol variation display, then the big hit game state It has come to move to.

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) was “5R big hit” or “15R big hit” and “crocodile panic” was executed, the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W did not reach 20 In the case (when the hit of 20 crocodile patterns W has failed), from the end of the above-mentioned time range for accepting operations, the end of “crocodile panic” (disappearing the display of the boss crocodile and returning to the state of variably displaying the decorative pattern ), A special performance is executed and “crocodile panic” is cleared. In this example, when the special lottery result is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit” and “crocodile panic” is executed and the operation acceptable time range in the latter half of the effect image ends, “crocodile panic” cannot be cleared. In the case (when hitting 20 crocodile patterns W has failed), after displaying a large crocodile pattern (boss crocodile) and displaying a comment corresponding to the number of hits, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is displayed. After reciprocating (vibrating) vigorously in the left-right direction, the LED 2122 in the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 blinks violently, and then an effect image in which the boss crocodile is hit and destroyed by the collar 2202 is displayed. ”Is cleared,“ crocodile panic ”is terminated, and a big hit gaming state is entered.

  Boss crocodile is displayed and a comment according to the number of hits (in this case, the comment that the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W did not reach the target number (20) (the fact that “crocodile panic” was not cleared)) After the display, the boss crocodile displays an effect image that is destroyed by the hit of the buttocks 2202 and notifies that the “crocodile panic” has been cleared, so that the hitting game cannot be cleared and the player's interest is reduced Even so, the boss crocodile is destroyed by the hit of the buttocks 2202 so that the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and can enhance the interest, and expect the subsequent “big hit” game It is possible to maintain interest in games. In addition, the interest that has declined due to the failure to clear the “crocodile panic” can be improved at a stretch, and even if the “crocodile panic” cannot be cleared, expectations for the big hit gaming state can be raised. Note that the special effects are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and at least the completion of “Alligator panic” from the end of the time range for accepting operations to the end of “Alligator panic” or a big hit Any aspect may be used as long as it is a notification effect.

  In this way, in the special performance specification executed when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) by the winning prize is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit”, the crocodile pattern W is hit. It is controlled so that it is difficult to clear the game (so that it is difficult to succeed in hitting the target number (20) of the crocodile pattern W). In the special performance specifications that are executed in the case of “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the hitting game of the crocodile pattern W cannot be cleared (so that the hitting of the target number (20) of the crocodile pattern W fails) Control. This makes it difficult to clear the hitting game of the crocodile pattern W (makes it difficult to hit the target number (20) of the crocodile pattern W), increases the difficulty, and clears the hitting game (number of targets). (20 crocodiles of the W crocodile pattern W have been successfully struck) It is possible to increase the sense of achievement at the time and to suppress the player's interests from being lowered, and to control so that the batting game cannot be cleared. However, the difficulty of the batting game itself is so high that it can be recognized that the batting game cannot be cleared, making it difficult to grasp that the batting game cannot be cleared, and the batting game cannot be cleared. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player by grasping that the player is controlling.

  In the embodiment described above, an operation handle (for example, the operation handle portion 461) is operated to drive a game ball into the game area 605, and the inserted game ball wins a start port (for example, the first start port 1502). Whether or not a special random number (for example, the first special random number) is extracted, and whether or not to make a big hit based on the special random number when the variable display according to the extracted special random number can be started When the lottery is performed, and the special symbol display (for example, the first special symbol display 1802) of the special symbol display (for example, the first special symbol display 1802) is variably displayed and the variable display is stopped according to the lottery result (for example, the special lottery result). If the lottery result indicating whether or not to win is determined to be a big hit, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state (for example, 15R big hit) where a lot of prize balls can be obtained. The pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1) is exemplified, but not limited to this, if it does not depart from this technical idea, a special random number is extracted when the operation handle is operated in a state where the variable display can be started, Based on the extracted special random number, whether or not to win a lottery is drawn, and the symbols are variably displayed to stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed according to the operation of the stop button and the lottery result of whether or not to win. In other gaming machines such as a pachislot machine (also called a slot machine) that controls to a big hit gaming state (for example, a big bonus) that can win a large amount of prize medals when it is suggested that the symbol that is stopped and displayed is a big hit You may comprise so that the said control (control which changes the appearance mode of the crocodile pattern W and / or control which delays the drive of the collar part 2202) to avoid may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the effect image (crocodile pattern W) that is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the accessory that rotates to the swing position and the striking position (the buttock portion 2202) are used as “crocodile crocodile panic”. ”Is executed to execute the control to avoid the above (control to change the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and / or control to delay the driving of the collar unit 2202), but is not limited to this. Similar to the control (execution control for changing the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and / or control for delaying the driving of the heel part 2202) by executing “crocodile panic” with the two types of effect images controlled by 640 Control or control to avoid the above by executing “crocodile panic” with two types of movable accessories movable in a predetermined manner (control to change the appearance mode of the crocodile pattern W and / or It may be configured to perform the same control as the control) for delaying the driving of 2202. That is, if it does not deviate from this technical idea, the above-described control (the control for changing the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and / or the driving of the collar unit 2202 is delayed) by combining the image display and the movable member. Control), or control for avoiding the above-described only by image display (control for changing the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and / or control for delaying the driving of the collar unit 2202). Alternatively, the above-described control (a control for changing the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and / or a control for delaying the driving of the collar unit 2202) may be executed by using only the movable member.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the crocodile pattern W is configured to appear and appear as “crocodile crocodile panic” a plurality of times. However, the control to avoid the above (control to change the appearance mode of the crocodile pattern W and / or the hook 2202 This technical idea of executing the control for delaying the driving) can be realized even when the crocodile pattern W is configured to appear and disappear only once.

  Next, the jackpot game effect will be specifically described. The jackpot game effect in this example is based on a predetermined random number determination table in which a first special random number or a second special random number extracted in response to a start winning of a game ball at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 is “ This is an effect executed during a “hit” game in which the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is determined to be “hit” and opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. In the main control board 1350 of this example, when a special random number of “big hit” is extracted, the open / close control of the opening / closing member 1508 corresponding to the “big hit (“ 2R big hit ”,“ 5R big hit ”,“ 15R big hit ”)” A pattern is selected, the opening / closing member 1508 is controlled to open / close along the pattern, and a command signal for big hit corresponding to “big hit” is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600. When the peripheral control board 2600 receives the jackpot command signal, the peripheral control board 2600 acquires a predetermined effect random number and selects the jackpot game effect image using the effect random number and the predetermined jackpot effect table. The jackpot game effect image is displayed, and the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 of the back unit 2000 are caused to emit a light effect and a movable effect so as to correspond to the jackpot game effect image.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example includes the operation buttons 330 that can be operated by the player, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation buttons 330 (in this example, the alligator panic) Reach, Hammer Chance Reach). In the case of performing the production reflecting the player's operation, there is an advantage that the game entertainment can be improved compared to the conventional gaming machine in which a predetermined result is displayed. This is only annoying for a player who does not want to operate the operation button 330, and the game itself may be deceived. In this example, the proportion of execution of effects according to the operation of the operation button 330 is changed in accordance with the player's preference. This will be described below. In this example, the reach effect is shown as an effect that reflects the operation of the operation button 330. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it does not deviate from this technical idea, a notice effect or the like executed before reach Even so, it is applicable.

  As described above, the first special symbol variation pattern mounted on the main control board 1350 is started when the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 1502 (start prize). The selection means 2564 selects any one of a plurality of types of first special symbol variation patterns, transmits a command signal indicating the selected first special symbol variation pattern to the peripheral control board 2680, and proceeds to the second start port 1506. When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in accordance with the winning of the game ball (start winning), the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 mounted on the main control board 1350 can provide a plurality of types of second special symbols. Any one of the variation patterns is selected and a command signal indicating the selected second special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2680.

  When the command signal indicating the command signal indicating the first special symbol variation pattern is received, the first special symbol received from the effect table set by the table setting unit 2652a by the effect pattern selection unit 2652 mounted on the peripheral control board 2680. When an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and a command signal indicating a command signal indicating the second special symbol variation pattern is received, the effect pattern selection means 2652 mounted on the peripheral control board 2680 is set by the table setting means 2652a. An effect pattern corresponding to the second special symbol variation pattern received from the effect table is selected, and display control of the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed based on the selected effect pattern.

  In this example, as a plurality of effect tables, an effect table that includes an effect pattern that executes an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330, and an effect table that does not include an effect pattern that executes an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330, The table setting unit 2652a sets an effect table including an effect pattern for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 when the power is turned on. When an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 is executed, the number of times that the operation button 330 is operated by the counting means 2666a in one effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 (in the operation receivable time range). The operation frequency determination means 2666b determines the operation frequency of the operation button 330 according to the predetermined number of operations of the operation button 330 for the above-mentioned effect, and the operation frequency is determined in advance. Switch to an effect table that does not include an effect pattern that executes an effect according to the operation of the operation button 330. If the operation frequency is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 that has already been set is executed. To continue the setting state of the effect table, including the effect pattern.

  As a result, the player who wants to operate the operation button 330 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330, but the player who does not want to operate the operation button 330 operates the operation button 330. By performing control so as not to execute an effect according to the game, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the player's preference. In this way, in this example, the operation frequency of the operation button 330 is determined without the player's knowledge, and the execution ratio of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is changed according to the determination result. The operation frequency of the operation button 330 can be determined in the same state as when the player plays a normal game without being aware of the determination of the operation frequency of the button 330, and is adapted to the player's preference. Production can be performed.

  In the example described above, the operation frequency of the operation button 330 is counted and the operation frequency is determined according to the operation frequency. However, the operation frequency of the operation button 330 is determined according to the operation frequency of the operation button 330. It is not limited to what is judged. For example, a period during which the operation button 330 is operated (a period during which an operation signal is input) is a predetermined period (for example, when an operation for a predetermined period is requested in an effect that has been performed, the required period or all periods Whether or not the operation button 330 is operated for a predetermined number of times (for example, the total number of times required or about half of the total number of times when a predetermined number of operations are requested in the executed performance). The operation frequency may be determined according to one or both of whether or not there are many.

  In addition, the data used for determining the operation frequency of the operation button 330 for one operation according to the operation of the operation button 330 is totaled to determine the operation frequency of the operation button 330, and an effect table is set according to the determination result. Although what is switched is shown, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the operation frequency may be determined by aggregating data used for determining the operation frequency of the operation button 330 for a plurality of effects. For example, the operation frequency may be determined by aggregating data used for determining the operation frequency of the operation button 330 regarding the two effects of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 executed last time and the present effect. In this case, the player's preference can be more accurately reflected. Further, for the same effect as the effect to be executed, data used for determining the operation frequency of the operation button 330 for a plurality of effects is totaled to determine the operation frequency. If the operation frequency is less than a predetermined value, the effect The execution frequency of the operation button 330 may be changed, or the data used for determining the operation frequency of the operation button 330 for a plurality of effects for all effects corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 may be aggregated. If the operation frequency is determined and the operation frequency is less than a predetermined value, the execution frequency of all effects according to the operation of the operation button 330 may be changed.

  Further, the total period for counting the data used to determine the operation frequency of the operation button 330 (in this example, the period for counting the number of operations) is not limited to the time range in which the operation can be accepted, but a predetermined total period The operation status (number of operations, operation period, etc.) of the operation button 330 may be totaled, and the operation frequency may be determined based on the total result. As a total period, for example, an arbitrary period (a whole period from a change start to a change stop (all periods may be sufficient) or a part of a change in an effect (reach effect, notice effect) according to the operation of the operation button 330 may be used. Period)), any period (a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change (all periods) in a specific effect among a plurality of effects (reach effect, notice effect) according to the operation of the operation button 330 Or any part of the period)), any period during the game (such as any period during the operation of the operation handle portion 461 (in contact)), or any of these Of these, any combination including a predetermined number may be used.

  In addition, an effect table including an effect pattern for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 as a plurality of effect tables, and an effect table not including an effect pattern for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 are provided. The effect pattern selection means 2652 is set as an effect table used when the effect pattern is selected, but each effect table is set so that the execution ratio of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is different. It may be configured to set any production table according to the operation frequency determination result. For example, when the operation frequency is equal to or higher than a predetermined first predetermined value, the ratio of executing the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is the highest (the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is performed). If the operation frequency is less than the second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value, the operation button 330 is set to the first effect table in which the effect patterns are set (to include the most effect patterns to be executed). An effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is not executed so that the proportion of the effect according to the operation is the lowest (so that the effect pattern according to the operation of the operation button 330 is minimized). As described above (not to include an effect pattern for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330), the third effect table is set to the effect pattern, and the operation frequency is the second. If the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value and less than the first predetermined value, the ratio of executing the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is higher than that of the third effect table (the operation button 330 is operated more than the third effect table). So as to include a lot of performance patterns for performing the performance according to the operation), and so that the ratio of performing the performance according to the operation of the operation button 330 is lower than that of the first performance table (the operation buttons than the first performance table). By setting in the second effect table in which the effect pattern is set (so as to include a small number of effect patterns for executing the effect according to the operation 330), the execution ratio of the effect is finely set according to the player's preference. be able to.

  Further, in addition to configuring each effect table so that the execution rate of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is different, each effect table is set so that the execution rate of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is different. Separately from the configuration (independently), the number of operation requests of the operation button 330 by an effect pattern that executes an effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 (in this example, the number of crocodiles and hammer chance reach that appear in the alligator panic It is also possible to configure each production table so that the number of times (such as the number of times of repeated hits) differs, and to set any production table according to the determination result of the operation frequency. For example, if the operation frequency is greater than or equal to a predetermined first predetermined value, it is set in the first effect table in which the effect pattern having the largest number of operation requests is set, and the operation frequency is higher than the first predetermined value. If it is less than the small second predetermined value, the operation frequency is set to the third effect table in which the effect pattern is set so that the operation request frequency is the smallest or the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 is not executed. If the value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value of 2 and less than the first predetermined value, an effect pattern in which an operation pattern is set more frequently than the third effect table and less operation requests than the first effect table is set. By setting in the 2 effect table, it is possible to finely set the number of operation requests according to the player's preference. It should be noted that the operation request is not limited to setting the number of operation requests for the same type of reach effect in each table, but by setting different types of reach effects to be executed in the same variation time in some or all effect tables. The number of times may be varied.

  As described above, in this example, the player's preference is determined according to the operation frequency of the operation button 330, and the execution ratio of the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330 is changed based on the determination result. It is possible to provide an effect tailored to the preference, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interests and, in turn, a decrease in operating rate of gaming machines.

  In the above-described example, the operation receivable time range during production according to the operation of the operation button 330 is set as the total period, and the operation status (the number of operations, the operation period, etc.) of the operation button 330 in the total period is totaled and operated. Since it is configured to determine the frequency, once switching to the effect table in which the effect pattern is set so as not to execute the effect according to the operation of the operation button 330, an opportunity to determine the operation frequency of the operation button 330 thereafter. In this case, in this case, the operation frequency is determined by counting the number of times the operation button 330 is operated during a predetermined counting period different from the operation receivable time range in the counting period. It may be set when the power is turned on after a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the game was stopped (operation stop of the operation handle portion 461 (non-contact)). Change to the effect table of the initial state may be set that. As a result, even if the player is switched, it is possible to provide an effect that matches the preference of the player who will play the game after that.

  Further, in the above-described example, the performance execution ratio according to the operation of the operation button 330 is changed by switching the effect table configured so that the performance execution ratio according to the operation of the operation button 330 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, a specific first special symbol variation pattern among a plurality of types of first special symbol variation patterns and a specific second special symbol variation pattern among a plurality of types of second special symbol variation patterns. Corresponding to the operation button 330, a plurality of types of effect patterns including an effect pattern that executes an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 and an effect pattern that does not require the operation of the operation button 330 are specified from the main control board 1350. When the command signal indicating the first special symbol variation pattern and the specific second special symbol variation pattern is received, the operation button 33 It may be to change the execution ratio of the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button 330 by selecting one of the performance pattern according to the frequency of operation. For example, if the operation frequency of the operation button 330 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, an effect pattern for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation button is selected at a high rate (100% may be selected), and the operation frequency of the operation button 330 is a predetermined value. If it is less than that, a high ratio (100% may be selected) of effect patterns that do not require the operation of the operation button 330 may be selected. In this case, an operation button corresponding to a specific first special symbol variation pattern among the plurality of types of first special symbol variation patterns and a specific second special symbol variation pattern among the plurality of types of second special symbol variation patterns. As the production according to the operation 330, a plurality of types of production patterns with different operation request counts are provided, and a plurality of types of production patterns with different operation request counts according to the operation frequency of the operation buttons 330 and operation of the operation buttons are requested. You may make it select either among the production patterns which are not performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a ball game machine using a game ball as a game medium has been described as an example. However, the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (so-called slot machine) using a game medal as a game medium. It is. That is, an operation button for an effect different from the stop button in a rotation effect in which a plurality of reels are rotated by inserting a game medal and operating a lever, and a corresponding reel is stopped by operating a stop button. The operation frequency of the operation button may be further determined, and the performance execution ratio may be changed according to the operation button operation according to the operation frequency.

  Further, in the above embodiment, control is performed so that the target number of “crocodile panic” (20 animals) crocodile pattern W cannot be hit (the number of crocodile pattern W hits) in the case of “2R big hit” or “small hit”. If it is 17 or more, the operation lottery probability selection table is configured so as to obtain an operation lottery result indicating that the hitting of the crocodile pattern W of the buttocks 2202 is not permitted at a rate of 100%, etc.), thereby clearing the “crocodile crocodile panic” Although not limited to this, in the case of “2R big hit” or “small hit” (only one of “2R big hit” and “small hit” may be used), “5R big hit” and “ Similarly to “15R jackpot”, the target number of “crocodile crocodile panic” (20 animals) may be controlled so as to be able to hit the crocodile pattern W so that the “crocodile panic” can be cleared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 by the player operating the operation handle 461 is received in the general winning opening 1702 or the like, the predetermined ball ball unit 800 has a predetermined value. When a number of game balls are paid out and game balls are received at the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506, a predetermined special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is drawn and drawn. In response to the special lottery results (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result), a “big hit” game, etc., which is advantageous to the player, and the opportunity to pay out more game balls is obtained. The interest of the player can be enhanced. On the other hand, when a predetermined production pattern (“crocodile panic”) is selected based on the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the production control means 2659 causes the liquid crystal display device 640 to produce a special production picture. A special effect image (crocodile alligator panic reach effect image) that causes the crocodile pattern W to appear and disappear is displayed, and the striking part 2202 can be turned according to the operation of the operation button 330, and the game is performed in accordance with the appearance of the crocodile pattern W When the user operates the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c of the operation button 330, the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is struck and rotated toward the appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 corresponding to the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c. If it is determined that the crocodile pattern W is to be hit with the buttock 2202, the buttock 2202 When the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W is counted, and the special lottery result and the number of hits satisfy a predetermined condition (the number of hits is 17), the hitting of the crocodile pattern W by the buttocks 2202 is regulated. A big hitting game. That is, as long as at least the special lottery result and the number of hits do not satisfy the predetermined conditions in the hitting game, the special effect image is hit with the buttocks 2202 simply by operating the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and discomfort compared to the case where the player does not make a hit judgment or the number of hits is different for the pattern hit. It is possible to entertain a game that strikes the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears by operating the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c without any sense of incongruity. When satisfied, the batting game 2202 is restricted from hitting the special effect image, so the batting game is cleared (in this example, the target number 20 lots of crocodiles W), the special lottery results (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) are “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit” and “5R big hit” It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged without the occurrence of “15R big hit” and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, even if at least the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) is any of “losing”, “small hit”, and “2R big hit”, the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W However, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of hits is 17), the hitting of the special effect image at the buttocks 2202 is restricted. That is, when the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W approaches the number of hits where the hit game is cleared (the number of hits is 20), the hit of the special effect image at the buttocks 2202 is regulated, and the hit game progresses. At the same time, until the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the buttock 2202 by the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c approaches the clear number of hits, the special effect image is hit by the normal buttock 2202 Therefore, it is possible to entertain the hitting game smoothly without giving a sense of incongruity to the hitting of the buttocks 2202 and to restrict the hitting of the special effect image at the buttocks 2202 when approaching the clear hitting number. In order to regulate the overlap of the crocodile pattern W and the crocodile pattern W 202 that has been rotated to the strike position by controlling the crocodile pattern W to be missed by the heel part 2202, The number of hit crocodile patterns W does not increase in spite of the fact that the heel part 2202 and the crocodile pattern W overlapped with each other (not one of the 20 crocodile patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640). It is possible to suppress an increase in the player's distrust due to the fact that “x” is not displayed, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Moreover, the difficulty of the batting game is increased by controlling the hitting of the special effect image at the buttock 2202 and failing to hit the crocodile pattern W at the buttock 2202, and the special lottery result (first special lottery result) When the second special lottery result is “5R jackpot” or “15R jackpot”, it is difficult to clear the batting game, so when the special lottery result is not “5R jackpot” or “15R jackpot” (“lost”, It is difficult to realize that the control is performed so that the hit game is not cleared to “small hit” and “2R big hit”. In addition, when the hit game cannot be cleared, it can be recognized that the hit game is not cleared because the hit game could not be cleared. Therefore, a “5R big hit” or “15R big hit” occurs after the hit game ends. Even if it is not, it can be avoided that the player's interest is greatly discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the operation button 330a of the operation button 330 during the batting game of hitting the crocodile pattern W appearing even when the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is “5R big hit” or “15R big hit”. , 330b, 330c, a predetermined operation lottery result is drawn, and the operation lottery means 2673 uses the operation lottery result to make a lottery to determine whether or not to allow the operation. When the operation lottery result indicating that the batting is not permitted is obtained, the heel part 2202 is controlled so as not to strike the crocodile pattern W, so the number of crocodile patterns W being hit is the target number at the early stage. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by suppressing reaching the (number of hits to clear the hit game) and not being able to enjoy the remaining time of the hit game.

  Further, since the driving of the heel part 2202 is delayed by the delay means 2668a, even if the operation button 330 is operated at the timing when it is recognized that the crocodile pattern W is hit when the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W is small, the crocodile is operated. When the number of strokes of the pattern W is large, the crocodile pattern W cannot be struck and the timing for operating the operation button 330 can be searched, so that the appearance of the crocodile pattern W and the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c It is possible to expect an effect of suppressing the player's interests from being lowered by giving the mood to the repetition of the operation and suppressing the hitting game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W by the buttocks 2202 is small, the lottery probability of the operation lottery result indicating that the hitting is permitted by the operation lottery means 2673 is increased, and when the number of hits is large, the lottery probability is lowered. Therefore, when the number of hits increases, the probability that it is determined that the crocodile pattern W has been hit is lowered even if the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c are operated to turn the collar part 2202, and the hit number is set to the target. It is possible to prevent the hitting game from being cleared early by making it difficult to reach the number 20 (number of hits to clear the hitting game). It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating due to the enjoyment. Further, since it is difficult to clear the batting game and the degree of difficulty can be increased, it is possible to further increase the sense of achievement when the batting game can be cleared and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  Also, depending on the number of hitting crocodile patterns W actually hit by operating the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c, the hitting game can be cleared or cannot be cleared by changing to a haunt pattern with different hitting difficulty levels. Compared to the case where the hit is not judged or the number of hits is changed even though the hit is made as in the past, the player feels distrust or discomfort. It is possible to prevent a sense of fun for the game from being reduced by making it possible to entertain the hitting game of hitting the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears by the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c without any discomfort. A player who can hit a crocodile pattern W that appears at high speed can be regarded as a player who has a high level of skill in the hitting game and can clear the hitting game. Since the way no operations until also the end of the striking game with high proficiency player button 330a, 330b, it becomes possible to operate the 330c, interest in the batting game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is movable in the direction in which the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are arranged, and the crocodile pattern W is operated by the operation button 330a. , 330b, 330c, and the like, and the crocodile pattern W can be struck by the buttocks 2202 at any position, so that the operation buttons 330a, 330b of the operation button 330 can be hit. , 330c, it is possible to hit all the appearing crocodile patterns W with the heel part 2202, giving the player an irritation, a feeling of frustration, etc. resulting from the fact that the structure cannot be clearly hit as in the prior art. Can increase the player's willingness to hit the game and reduce the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

  Further, since at least the display of the special effect image is not started, the operation of the operation button 330 is not accepted, so even if the player carelessly operates the operation button 330 during a normal game, It is possible to prevent the collar portion 2202 of the center movable ornament 2200 from moving according to the operation, and to suppress the player's interest from being reduced by the unnecessary movement of the center movable ornament 2200. it can.

  Further, the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the buttock 2202 by the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, 330c by the hit number counting means 2672 is counted, and the counted hit number or a predetermined hit number (battery Since the remaining number of hits with respect to the target number of hits in the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the target of the hit game can be re-recognized by recognizing the actual number of hits, It can be expected that the player's interest is enhanced toward clearing the hit game.

  Further, since the player's skill level for the batting game can be estimated from the progress of the special effect image and the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W by operating the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, the number of hits and the special effect image The optimum appearance pattern may be selected from the appearance patterns with different difficulty levels according to the progress of the game.For example, when the number of hits is small with respect to the progress of the special performance image, the player's skill Since the degree is low, the haunting pattern having a low hitting difficulty is selected so that the player can easily hit the crocodile pattern W, and the hitting game can be enjoyed. On the other hand, when the number of hits is large with respect to the progress of the special effect image, it is difficult to hit the crocodile pattern W by selecting a haunting pattern having a high hitting difficulty because the player is highly skilled. Thus, the player can be more concentrated on the batting game, and the interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Furthermore, since the special effect image is divided into a plurality of cuts, and the appearance pattern is selected for each of the cuts, it is possible to suppress continuous control of the appearance pattern, and the load related to the effect control. It is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of the player's game and to prevent a player from having trouble during the performance and reducing the player's interest in the game.

  Further, when the cut of the special effect image is switched, the appearance pattern is selected from the predetermined appearance pattern table according to the display lottery result of the display lottery means 2678 separately from the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W. Therefore, compared with the case where the haunt pattern is selected only by the number of hits, the type of the haunt pattern to be selected can be widened, and the batting game can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, as the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the heel part 2202 by the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in the operation button 330 increases, the appearance pattern table changing means 2676 changes the appearance pattern table to a higher difficulty level. Since the appearance pattern is selected, it becomes difficult to hit the crocodile pattern W by the buttocks 2202 even if the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are operated as the target hitting number for clearing the hitting game is approached. The player can concentrate on the operation of the operation buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c until the batting game is completed, and the game can be enjoyed until the end to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Also, if the hit judging means 2668 determines that the heel part 2202 can hit the crocodile pattern W, the crocodile picture W based on the fact that the hit has been performed (the butt part 2202 has been rotated to the hit position). Since the display mode is changed, the player can be surely recognized that the crocodile pattern W has been struck, and can be given the pleasure of striking the crocodile pattern W. It is possible to entertain the batting game and suppress the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined production pattern (“hammer chance reach”) is selected based on the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the production control means 2659 displays a specific effect image (hammer chance) in which the door picture T is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 and enables the striking rotation of the buttock 2202 by the operation of the operation button 330 to display the specific effect image. When the player operates the operation button 330, the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is struck and rotated to strike the door design T displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 and then the side decorative member of the side movable decorative body 2300. 2302 reciprocates in the left-right direction, a predetermined operation lottery result is drawn, and the display pattern of the door pattern T is fully opened according to the lottery operation lottery result. Since the display mode is changed to one step, the movement of the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 that are struck and rotated by the operation of the operation button 330 and the change of the door picture T The player can be surprised and entertained, and the door design T can be seen as if it has been changed by striking the buttocks 2202, which increases the realism of the specific performance image and increases the willingness to operate the operation buttons 330. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Moreover, since the door picture T in the closed state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 by the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance), it may be good if the door picture T is opened to the player at first glance. And the operation button 330 can be operated to hit the door design T by the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 to open the door design T, and display a specific effect image. A player can be actively participated in such an effect, and the effect on the game can be suppressed from deteriorating by making the effect enjoyable.

  Further, when the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is struck and rotated by the operation of the operation button 330, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 reciprocates in the left-right direction, so that only the collar 2202 is struck. Compared with the case where it is moved, it looks as if the side decoration member 2302 is swaying due to the impact of the impact of the collar 2202, and can improve the realistic feeling of the door design T impact by the collar 2202, It is possible to entertain the effects relating to the display of the specific effect image, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the display mode of the door pattern T is changed according to the operation lottery result that is selected based on the operation of the operation button 330. Since the door picture T may change or may not change, the player can continuously operate the operation button 330 so that the door picture T changes, and the specific effect image (hammer chance) ) Can be surely made to participate in the production related to the display, and the production related to the display of the specific production image can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, the operation button 330 is displayed during the lottery available time range within the operation receivable time range in which the specific effect image (hammer chance) is displayed and the batting portion 2202 can be struck and rotated according to the operation of the operation button 330. Since the operation lottery result is drawn in accordance with the operation, it is possible to prevent the door design T from changing completely at an early stage from the start of the display of the specific effect image and becoming a fully open display mode. While the specific effect image is displayed, it is possible to maintain the willingness to operate the operation buttons 330, to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to prepare more door designs T with different display modes. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the ROM 2604, the CPU 2602, and the like, and the above-described control can be performed smoothly.

  Further, when the display mode of the door pattern T is changed by one step by the pattern changing means 2670, the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202 according to the operation of the operation button 330 is disabled for a predetermined short time, and the operation button 330 is in the meantime. Since the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 does not turn and rotate even when is operated, the display mode of the door pattern T does not change, so that the display mode of the changed door pattern T is kept at least for a predetermined short time. It is possible to make the player visually recognize that the display mode of the door picture T has changed, entertain the door picture T itself, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the display mode of the door pattern T changes, the striking rotation of the collar 2202 according to the operation of the operation button 330 is disabled for a predetermined short period of time. Since it takes a long time to change, it becomes possible for the player to operate the operation button 330 more (continuously hit) so that the display mode of the door picture T changes quickly, and the operation button 330 is continuously ( The operation related to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) can be made difficult to get tired, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from being lowered.

  Furthermore, according to the display mode of the door picture T, the lottery probability that the operation lottery result in which the display mode of the door picture T is changed by the operation lottery means 2673 is lottered is made different depending on the display mode of the door picture T. Since the door pattern T is easy to change or difficult to change, it is possible to prevent a monotonous effect from being given to the effect related to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance), and to be tired. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, when the special lottery result relating to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) is “big hit”, at the end of the specific effect image, the display mode of the door pattern T is changed to the fully open display mode to end the display. Therefore, the display of the specific effect image is prevented from ending in a half-finished state, it becomes a complete state, the specific effect image can be shown without a sense of incongruity, and the display related to the display of the specific effect image can be prevented from being enjoyed. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, when the special lottery result related to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) is “losing”, at the end of the specific effect image, the door design T is changed to a fully closed display mode and is ended. By returning to the first fully closed display mode of the door pattern T, it is possible to make it appear that the game by the operation of the operation button 330 could not be cleared and not to become a “hit” after displaying the specific effect image. Therefore, even if the player does not actually become “big hit”, the player can be relieved from feeling lost and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control board box 624 containing the main control board 1350 is supported by the panel holder 600 and the second decoration control board 1358 as the peripheral control board 2600 is housed. Since the decoration control board box 1360 is supported across the back side of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640, the main control board box 624 and the second decoration control board box 1360 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. Since the space in the front-rear direction occupied by the board boxes 624 and 1360 can be reduced as compared with the case where it is arranged, the space behind the game panel 599 can be relatively widened, and the space is expanded. Large light-emitting decorative body 2004, movable decorative body 2006, and the like can be arranged in a large space. By arranging the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006, not only the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 640 but also the light emitting decoration (light emission effect) of the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable effect of the movable decorative body 2006 can be performed. By showing various effects to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, since the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported on the rear side so as to straddle the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640, the exposure amount of the second decoration control board box 1360 can be increased. It is possible to sufficiently release the heat generated from the second decoration control board 1358 to prevent the operation of the CPU 2602 and the like from becoming unstable due to the heat accumulation, thereby preventing the occurrence of a malfunction. It is possible to reliably control the effects by the decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, even if the production control on the second decoration control board 1358 is increased to generate a large amount of heat, the second decoration control board 1358 can sufficiently dissipate heat. The three types of movable decorative bodies 2006, that is, the decorative body 2300 and the under movable decorative body 2400, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the liquid crystal display device 640 can be reliably controlled. The liquid crystal display device 640 makes it difficult to get bored by performing various effects, and can further prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, since the second decoration control board box 1360 and the liquid crystal display device 640 are separated, the liquid crystal display device 640 has a liquid crystal as compared with the case where the peripheral control board 2600 such as the second decoration control board 1358 is provided. It is possible to prevent the cost of the display device 640 from increasing, and to prevent an increase in the cost for replacement or repair of the liquid crystal display device 640 when a failure occurs in the liquid crystal display device 640. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, the center role 1400 provided in the transparent game panel 599, the light-emitting decorative body 2004 seen through the transparent game panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center role 1400, the liquid crystal display device 640 seen through the ring of the center role 1400, and the movable Since the decoration body 2006 is provided, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 have a different atmosphere at first glance from the conventional pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to enhance the decoration of the entire game area 605 and attract the player at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing, and the pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, even when the liquid crystal display device 640 is not fixed to the back box 2002, the second decoration control board box 1360 can be supported by the back box side support portion 2036 of the back box 2002. Even when not attached to the box 2002, the peripheral control board 2600 such as the second decoration control board 1358 in the second decoration control board box 1360 is checked for the operation of the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 fixed to the back box 2002. In the assembly process of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to find a defective product at an early stage, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the second decoration control board box 1360 is rotatably supported by the back box side support portion 2036 and is detachably supported by the display side support portion 604b. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 640 is attached and detached. At this time, the second decoration control board box 1360 is rotated to a position that does not interfere with the liquid crystal display device 640, so that the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported by the back box 2002. Installation and removal can be performed. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 640 is assembled or repaired, the second decoration control board box 1360 may not be completely removed. Forgetting to attach the removed second decoration control board box 1360 can be prevented.

  Further, a light emitting decorative body 2004 is fixed to the front end portion of the box-shaped back box 2002, and a movable decorative body 2006 is accommodated and fixed in the back box 2002, and then a frame-shaped panel holder 600 for holding a transparent game panel 599. Since the back box 2002 is fixed to the transparent gaming panel 599, the luminous decoration body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 are not directly fixed to the rear surface side of the transparent gaming panel 599. 2004, movable decorative body 2006 and the like can be arranged, and it is possible to prevent the fixed portions of the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 from being seen from the player side and to deteriorate the appearance. 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 can be provided on the rear side of the game panel 599 without any problem, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the annular center accessory 1400 is fixed to the opening 599e formed in the transparent game panel 599, the liquid crystal display device 640 passes through the ring of the center accessory 1400. The display image can be directly viewed to make the effect image easy to see, and the inner peripheral end of the opening 599e is formed by the opaque front annular portion 1400a and the insertion annular portion 1400b on which the plated layer of the center accessory 1400 is formed. It is possible to conceal it so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and it is possible to prevent the end face (inner peripheral end face) of the inner peripheral end portion having a rough surface roughness from being seen and the appearance in the game area 605 from being deteriorated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the inner peripheral portion of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 is concealed so that it cannot be seen by the center accessory 1400, and even if the surface roughness of the inner peripheral end surface of the opening 599e is rough, the appearance does not deteriorate. There is no need to finish the inner peripheral end face of the portion 599e, and it can be left in a state of cutting or the like, so that the labor for forming the opening 599e can be simplified and the game panel 599 is expensive. It is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  Furthermore, since the center role 1400 having the stage 1406 for rolling the game ball is provided, not only the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 640 but also the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, since the luminous decoration body 2004 is made visible through the transparent gaming panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400, a large liquid crystal display device is arranged to display a pattern, a pattern, or the like. Compared to those, the three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 2004 makes it possible to enhance the decoration of the entire game area 605, enhance the appeal to the player, and can be differentiated from other gaming machines, The interest of the player is strongly attracted and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the movable decorative body 2006 can be visually recognized through the ring of the center accessory 1400, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be visually recognized without passing through the transparent gaming panel 599, so that reflection from the gaming panel 599 is possible. It is possible to prevent the movable decorative body 2006 from becoming difficult to see due to light or the like, and to make the movable decorative body 2006 easy to see, to make the movable performance enjoyable and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. .

  In addition, since the center actor 1400 is provided with a plating layer, light incident from the player side can be reflected to the player side, so that light such as illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected. By reflecting off the plated layer, the center role 1400 can be brilliantly shining, and the center role 1400 can be clearly displayed, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, since the center accessory 1400 does not protrude from the rear surface of the game panel 599 except for the stage 1406, the light-emitting decorative body 2004 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599 is arranged with respect to the rear surface of the game panel 599. As a result, the storage space 2010 formed between the light-emitting decorative body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 can be made as wide as possible, so that the player's A movable decorative body 2006 having a size and a movable range that attracts interest can be arranged, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered by the movable effect.

  Further, when a game ball flowing down in the game area 605 on the outer peripheral side surface of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp passage 1404, it is guided into a ninety-nine fold shape by the ninety-nine fold guide path 1410 and then supplied to the stage 1406. As a result, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball that rolls in a 99-fold shape, and to reduce the speed of the game ball to be supplied onto the stage 1406 at an optimum speed. The game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction on the stage 1406, and a desired performance effect can be exerted to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, since the insertion annular portion 1400b of the center accessory 1400 is provided with a transparent protective wall portion 1418, the game ball is prevented from entering the accommodation space 2010 in which the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed from above the stage 1406. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the game ball entering the storage space 2010 and the player's interest in the game from being reduced. Further, since the protective wall portion 1418 is transparent, the liquid crystal display device 640, the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through the protective wall portion 1418, and the rendering effect by them Can be suppressed, and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, and the side motor base cover that guide the movable decorative member 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 in a predetermined direction. Since 2328 is supported by the center base member 2210 and the side base member 206 made of a metal plate, the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322 and the like can be firmly supported, and the movable decorative body 2006 is provided. The guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, and the like can be prevented from being shaken or distorted even if they are moved by the center moving motor 2214, the side motor 2324, and the like. 2302 etc. are enlarged or moved violently Even in the so that, it is possible to move the front decorative member 2246 and side decorative member 2302 is prevented from becoming unnatural, a desired movable decorative body 2006 in which the movable effect is obtained.

  Further, the back box 2002 to which the center base member 2210 and the side base member 2306 such as the center movable decoration body 2200 and the side movable decoration body 2300 are fixed has a box shape, which is more than a plate shape or a frame shape. Since the movable decorative member such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 is enlarged or moved violently, a large inertia force or moment is applied to the back box 2002 from the movable decorative body 2006. Even if it acts, it can prevent that the back box 2002 deform | transforms, and can support the movable decoration body 2006 without a problem. Accordingly, the movable decorative member such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 of the movable decorative body 2006 can be enlarged or moved violently, and the movable decorative body 2006 is provided that can make the player more entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, since the opening 2012 of the back box 2002 is closed by the liquid crystal display device 640, the rigidity of the back box 2002 can be increased also by the liquid crystal display device 640, and the movable decorative body 2006 is supported without problems. be able to.

  Further, the center base member 2210 and the side base member 2306 such as the center movable ornament 2200 and the side movable ornament 2300 are formed of a metal plate, and compared with the case where the base members 2210 and 2306 are formed of resin. As a result, even if the thickness of the base members 2210 and 2306 is reduced, the required strength and rigidity can be obtained, and the base members 2210 and 2306 can be reduced in thickness. The depth direction (front-rear direction) of the movable decorative member such as the member 2302 can be increased to obtain a more three-dimensional movable decorative member. As a movable decorative member having a higher decorative effect, the player is entertained and less interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixed to the back box 2002, it is possible to reduce the restriction on the arrangement position of the movable decorative body 2006, and any The movable decorative body 2006 can be disposed at the position, and the desired movable decorative body 2006 can be disposed at the desired position, so that the pachinko machine 1 that reliably obtains the desired effect can be obtained.

  Further, when the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixed to the back box 2002, the positioning protrusion of the back box 2002 and the positioning hole of the base member are fitted to each other, The movable decorative body 2006 can be securely fixed to a predetermined position of the back box 2002, and the movable decorative body 2006 is prevented from being fixed at the shift position, and the movable front decorative member 2246, the side decorative member 2302, etc. It is possible to prevent the movable decorative member from coming into contact with other members and causing problems.

  In addition, the base members 2210 and 2306 of the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 are provided with reinforcing pieces 2210d and 2306e, and the base members 2210 and 2306 are arranged in the longitudinal direction. Since the rigidity of the base members 2210 and 2306 can be increased by suppressing distortion and bending, the movable decorative members such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 can be made larger or more violently moved. It is possible to support the movable decorative member via the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, etc. without any problem, and the movable decorative member can be increased in size or moved faster. It is equipped with the movable decoration body 2006 that attracts attention and suppresses the player's interests from deteriorating. It is possible.

  Further, through holes 2210e and 2306d for light weight are formed in the base members 2210 and 2306 of the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300, and the base members 2210 and 2306 made of metal plates are formed. Since 2306 can be reduced in weight, it is possible to suppress an increase in weight even when the size of the movable decorative body 2006 is increased, thereby suppressing an increase in the weight of the entire back unit 2000. It is possible to prevent an unnecessary load from being applied to a portion fixed to the panel holder 600 and prevent a problem from occurring.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599, a large-sized liquid crystal display device is arranged and a pattern or a pattern is arranged. The three-dimensional light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 can improve the decoration of the entire game area 605 and increase the appeal to the player, compared to a flat display that displays etc. It can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the center movable decorative body 2200, the side movable decorative body 2300, and the under movable decorative body 2400 are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 640, the movable decorative body 2006 makes it look like a conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a different atmosphere can be obtained, and in addition to the light emitting decorative body 2004 arranged on the front side of the movable decorative body 2006, the decoration of the entire game area 605 is enhanced, and the game can be seen at a glance. As a pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. .

  Further, since the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006 can be made difficult to be seen from the player side by the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the appearance of the movable decorative body 2006 appears. It is possible to provide a movable effect that makes it possible to entertain (being visible from the player side), and to increase the types of movable effects by the movable decorative body 2006, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is caused to emit light, the light is diffused widely by the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110. Therefore, the LED 2120 that emits light in a dot shape is caused to emit light in a substantially planar shape. Thus, a wider range of the light-emitting decorative body 2004 can be light-decorated, and the decoration effect can be enhanced by making it appear beautiful, so that the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, since the light of the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration substrate 2130 is diffused by the plate-shaped diffusion lens member 2110, the thickness of the entire light emitting decoration body 2004 in the front-rear direction (depth direction) can be reduced. By reducing the thickness of the light-emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006 can be made larger or moved by relatively widening the accommodation space 2010, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be more enjoyed by the player. It can arrange | position and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, the decorative member 2100 shaped in a predetermined shape is arranged on the front side of the diffusing lens member 2110, and the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 faces the player side through the opening 2101 formed in the decorative member 2110. The light from the LED 2120 on the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 can be irradiated to the player side through the lens portion 2113 and the opening 2101, and the light emitting decorative body 2004 can be surely decorated with light emission, and light is emitted by the decorative member 2100. Even if the surface of the decorative body 2004 has a highly decorative shape and the LED 2120 does not emit light, the predetermined decorative effect can be exhibited, and the appearance of the game board 4 is improved and the player's interest is not reduced. can do.

  Further, since the light incident from the player side can be reflected to the player side by the plating layer formed on the surface side of the decorative member 2100, even when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 is not emitting light, Light such as lighting in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed is reflected by the plating layer, so that the decoration member 2100 can shine brilliantly, and the decoration effect is exhibited even when the LED 2120 is turned off. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating.

  Further, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decorative body 2004 is caused to emit light, the entire light emitting decorative body 2004 emits light radially, so that the entire game area 605 becomes bright and can surprise the player, thereby attracting the player's attention and playing the game. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls. In addition, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 is caused to emit light, the light emitting decoration is annularly and radially radiated, and the tip of the light is concentrated at the center of the game area 605, so that the liquid crystal display disposed at the center of the game area 605 It is possible to focus attention on the device 640, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the effect image.

  In addition, since light from a group of LEDs 2120 corresponding to the other lens portions 2113 can be blocked by a light emitting partition member 2160, a certain lens portion 2113 emits light so that each lens portion 2113 is not affected by each other. Thus, the light emission mode can be made different for each lens portion 2113. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of light emission effects by the light emitting decoration body 2004 and to perform various light emission effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and lowering the player's interest.

  Further, since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the light emitting decorative body 2004 is within a range of 10% to 40% with respect to the depth of the back box 2002, the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 are It is possible to sufficiently secure the accommodating space 2010 of the movable decorative body 2006 formed between them, and it is possible to arrange the movable decorative body 2006 having a size and a movable range that can attract the player's interest. It is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being lowered by the movable decorative body 2006.

  Further, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be struck by the center movable decorative body 2200, and the visible area of the display screen in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed by the side movable decorative body 2300. The lower movable decoration body 2400 can change the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, and various movable effects can be performed by moving each movable decoration body 2200, 2300, 2400 alone or in combination. This makes it possible to increase the types (patterns) of the movable effects and make the movable effects difficult to get tired, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by enjoying the movable effects by the movable decorative body 2006.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that are driven into the game area 605 by the player operating the operation handle portion 461 are the first and second start openings 1502 and 1506 and the general winning opening. When it is accepted to 1702, etc., a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, and when it is accepted to the first and second start ports 1502, 1506, a predetermined special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) Is selected, and a big hit game or the like occurs as an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous according to the result of the special lottery, and an opportunity for more game balls to be paid out is obtained. Can be increased. When a predetermined effect pattern (“reach lose”, “per reach”) is selected on the basis of the special lottery result, the side decorative member 2302 is displayed in a “reach” state when the variably displayed symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. Moving to the separation position, the viewable area of the display screen is enlarged, and an effect image (for example, reach development effect image) for finalizing the final symbol is displayed on a powerful large screen. Can be enjoyed, and the expectation for “big hit” can be enhanced to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the display area (viewable area) on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is not enlarged or reduced on the display screen, but by the movement of the side decoration member 2302 in the side movable decoration body 2300. Since the visible area (display area) of the display screen is enlarged or reduced, and the position of the three-dimensional side decoration member 2302 moves with the change of the display area, the appearance of the game board 4 changes. The atmosphere can be changed, and the player can be surprised or made to feel new, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to difficulty in getting bored.

  Further, since the decorative plate 2340 made of a mirror-like reflecting plate is provided at a position corresponding to the separation position on the rear side of the side decoration member 2302, even if the side decoration member 2302 is positioned at the approach position, the separation position The decorative plate 2340 arranged at the corresponding position can prevent the back wall 2014 from concealing the rear wall 2014 and prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and can suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the movable decorative body 2006, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the like arranged on the front side of the decorative plate 2340 are reflected on the decorative plate 2340 and reflected, it is possible to make an illusion that the depth is deeper than the original depth. Further, it is possible to decorate the decorative plate 2340 without applying a design, a pattern, or the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost related to the decorative plate 2340 while suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 moves to the separation position in accordance with the display of the special effect image (crocodile panic reach effect image) in which the crocodile pattern W appears, so that the viewable area is enlarged. A special effect image will be displayed on the screen, and a batting game in which the crocodile pattern W is hit with the buttocks 2202 can be performed on a powerful large screen, making the special effect image full of realism. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is movable on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 so that the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 in the back unit 2000 strikes the display screen, and is disposed on the left and right sides. Since the side decoration member 2302 of the movable decoration body 2300 reciprocates left and right, the movement of the three-dimensional collar portion 2202 and the side decoration member 2302 makes it possible to attract the player's attention and attract attention. It is possible to entertain the production and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, only the upper part of the side decorative member 2302 is guided by the side moving mechanism 2304 in the side movable decorative body 2300, and the side decorative member 2302 is suspended from the side moving mechanism 2304. The lower part of the decorative member 2302 can move freely, and when the side decorative member 2302 is moved, the side decorative member 2302 moves in a fluffy manner, and a change can be given to the movement of the side decorative member 2302. Therefore, the side decoration member 2302 can be moved more naturally, and the movable effect by the side decoration member 2302 can be more enjoyed.

  Further, the side motor base 2322 that supports the side motor 2324 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is provided with a guide portion 2322a so as to guide the slide member 2332 in the left-right direction, so that the guide for guiding the slide member 2332 is provided. Compared with the case where the portion 2322a is a member different from the side motor base 2322, the number of parts related to the side moving mechanism 2304 can be reduced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the side movement can be suppressed. The mechanism 2304 can be made compact and can be miniaturized, and the side decoration member 2302 can be made larger with respect to the miniaturization of the side moving mechanism 2304 to easily attract the player's attention, thereby enhancing the decoration effect. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the lower end of the side decorative member 2302 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the guide box 2344 fixed to the lower part of the side base member 2306 in the side movable decorative body 2300, the side moving mechanism 2304 is controlled. Therefore, when the side decoration member 2302 is moved, the lower end of the side decoration member 2302 can be prevented from shaking greatly, and the lower end of the side decoration member 2302 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the occurrence and the player's interest from being lowered. Further, the side base member 2306 is formed of a metal plate, and the required strength can be obtained even if the side base member 2306 is made thinner than the case where the side base member 2306 is formed of resin. Since rigidity can be obtained and the side base member 2306 can be thinned, the depth direction (front-rear direction) of the side decoration member 2302 can be increased accordingly, and a three-dimensional decoration member can be obtained. As the side decoration member 2302 having a higher decoration effect, the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 in the outer frame 2 are made of metal extrusion molds, thereby increasing the horizontal dimension of the game board installation recess 510 in the main body frame 3. The vertical size of the gaming window 101 is increased by providing only one dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame 5, and the rearward projecting amounts of the rear side walls 541, 542, 543 in the main body frame 3 are increased. Since the depth of the game board installation recess 510 is made as large as possible by setting the position substantially the same as the rear end side of the prize ball tank 720, the larger game board 4 can be favorably supported. That is, the game board 4 can be further enlarged, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is rotated to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 forming the game area 605 and the liquid crystal display device. Since the collar part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 that moves in the left-right direction along the upper edge of 640 can be enlarged, a movable effect of hitting the display screen by the large collar part 2202 can be performed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player by turning the buttocks 2202 and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the batting game by the batting rotation of the buttocks 220 entertaining. it can.

  In addition, a handle 2234 that connects the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 and the rotation shaft 2232 that can move left and right along the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and that can strike the display screen. Since the bent portion is bent on the surface orthogonal to the rotating shaft 2232, that is, on the rotating surface of the flange portion 2202, the length of the handle portion 2234 is made larger than the actual radius of the flange portion 2202 with respect to the rotating shaft 2232. Even if the heel part 2202 is increased in proportion to the length of the handle part 2234, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Accordingly, since the heel portion 2202 can be made larger compared to the case where the linear handle portion is used as in the conventional case, the heel portion 2202 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating due to the expectation for the movable performance by the unit 2202.

  Further, since the handle portion 2234 is bent on the rotation surface of the flange portion 2202, the rotation radius of the flange portion 2202 can be reduced with respect to the length of the handle portion 2234, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232 can be reduced. The moment acting on the heel portion 2202 due to the movement is also reduced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the handle portion 2234 is bent or damaged by the moment. Further, since the force acting on the handle portion 2234 is smaller than when the handle portion 2234 is linear, the hook portion 2202 can be rotated at a higher speed, and the hook portion rotating faster. The player can be surprised by 2202, and it is possible to entertain the movable effect of the buttocks 2202 and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is arranged via the handle portion 2234 so as to substantially coincide with the surface passing through the axis of the rotation shaft 2232, and the rotation shaft 2232. Can be arranged at a position as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232 rotates the collar 2202 between the striking position and the swinging position. Since the rotation range on the swing position side can be made as large as possible, the heel portion 2202 and the handle portion 2234 can be made as large as possible, and the movable effect by the large heel portion 2202 This makes it possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the handle portion 2234 can be thickened without increasing a sense of incongruity along with the enlarged flange portion 2202, the moment acting on the flange portion 2202 can be sufficiently counteracted by the rotation, as described above. Can be prevented from occurring or the collar 2202 can be rotated faster, and the collar 2202 can be quickly moved to increase the response of the collar 2202 to the operation of the operation button 330. By moving the buttocks 2202 at the player's will, the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 can be made substantially parallel to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 when the collar portion 2202 is struck and rotated, the collar portion 2202 having no sense of incongruity. It is possible to make the movement and direction of the heel part 2202 entertain without any discomfort, and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the heel motor 2226 is not disposed on the axis of the rotation shaft 2232 supported by the heel support member 2224, the rotation shaft 2232 is as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. When the collar 2202 is rotated between the striking position and the raising position by the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232, the rotation range on the raising position side is made as much as possible. Since it can be enlarged, the heel part 2202 and the handle part 2234 can be enlarged as much as possible, and the player can be entertained by a movable effect by the large heel part 2202 to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

  Further, the rotation of the rotary shaft of the heel motor 2226 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 2232 by meshing between the first gear 2228 fixed to the rotary shaft and the second gear 2230 fixed to the rotary shaft 2232. Therefore, compared with a transmission structure using a pulley and a belt, no slippage occurs between the first gear 2228 and the second gear 2230, and the rotation of the bag motor 2226 is reliably rotated. It can be transmitted to the shaft 2232, and the rotation of the collar portion 2202 is made to follow the rotation of the cage motor 2226 with certainty, thereby making it possible to reliably produce a desired movable effect and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  Further, the rotation of the flange portion 2202 from the striking position can be restricted by the contact of the one rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 with the first contact portion 2224c of the support member 2224 for the flange. At the same time, the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 abuts on the second abutting portion 2224d of the heel support member 2224, thereby restricting the collar 2202 from rotating more than the swinging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flange 2202 from hitting the liquid crystal display device 640 due to the inertial force when the batting is rotated, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is damaged or damaged during the game. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring and to prevent the game from being interrupted and the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, when the hook portion 2202 rotates to the striking position or the swing-up position by the detection of the rotation detection sensor 2256, the rotation driving of the hook motor 2226 is stopped, so that the rotation restricting piece 2230b and the first contact are stopped. A rotational driving force is applied from the scissors motor 2226 to the rotation shaft 2232 whose rotation is restricted by the rotation restriction means composed of the contact portion 2224c and the second contact portion 2224d, and the rotation restriction means and It is possible to prevent an unnecessary load from being applied to the motor 2226, and it is possible to prevent the bag motor 2226 and the like from being damaged early.

  In addition, since the rotation detection piece 2228b is provided in the first gear 2228 disposed on an axis different from the axis of the rotation shaft 2232, the rotation shaft 2232 is provided on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can arrange | position so that it may approach as close as possible, can exhibit the effect mentioned above reliably, and can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  Further, it rotates to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 forming the game area 605 and moves left and right along the upper edge of the liquid crystal display device 640. The center movable decorative body 2200 having the section 2202 is provided, and the three-dimensional collar 2202 actually blows the door design T, the crocodile design W, etc. displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. As a result, it becomes possible to produce a more realistic batting effect compared to the conventional case, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly by the production with increased realism and make it difficult to get bored, and the interest in games is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 moves in the left-right direction along the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, the collar portion 2202 can hit various positions on the display screen, and is more complicated. It is possible to suppress the monotonous and easy to get bored by giving a strong batting effect, and to prevent the player from making the game more entertaining and less fun for the game.

  Further, the plate-like game panel 599 that partitions the rear side of the game area 605 is made transparent, and the movable decoration body 2006 and the liquid crystal display device 640 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599 can be viewed through the game panel 599. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, it is not necessary to visually recognize the movable decoration body through the through-hole formed in the game panel, and the movable range of the movable decoration body 2006 and the area where the game ball actually flows down are substantially omitted. Even if the amount of movement of the collar portion 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 of the movable decorative body 2006 in the horizontal direction is increased, the area where the game ball on the front side of the game panel 599 actually flows down changes. Without falling off, can ensure a flow-down area that can fully entertain the player, and reduce the enjoyment caused by the movement of the original game ball of the pachinko machine Without, it can strike a crocodile pattern W infested in different positions hammer portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 to move as much as possible greater.

  In addition, since the movable decorative body 2006 is provided in the box-shaped back box 2002 in the back unit 2000, at least dust and dust are prevented from entering the back box 2002 from the rear side of the game board 4. It is possible to prevent dust or the like from adhering to the movable part of the movable decorative body 2006, thereby causing a malfunction in the movable decorative body 2006 and causing the game to be interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Further, when the pinion gear 2218 rotates together with the rotation of the center moving motor 2214, the sliding body 2222 provided with the rack gear 2220 meshing with the pinion gear 2218 moves in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the pinion gear 2218, and the sliding body 2222 is moved. The flange 2202 supported by the can move in the left-right direction. Since the pinion gear 2218 is disposed at a position corresponding to the substantially center of the guide member 2208, the slide body 2222 can be moved over the substantially entire length of the guide member 2208, and the movable range of the slide body 2222 is increased. Can be as wide as possible. Therefore, since the range of movement of the heel portion 2202 supported by the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction can be increased as much as possible, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the heel portion 2202 that moves greatly. The movement of the part 2202 can be enjoyed and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, since both ends of the guide member 2208 for guiding the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction are supported by the center base member 2210 made of a metal plate, the guide member 2208 can be firmly supported, and the collar portion Even if a force in a direction different from the axial direction of the guide member 2208 acts on the guide member 2208 via the sliding body 2222 due to the rotation of 2202, the guide member 2208 can be prevented from being shaken or distorted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the flange 2202 itself due to the rotation of the flange 2202 and unnatural movement, and entertain the player by rotating the flange 2202 without a sense of incongruity. It can suppress that interest falls. Further, since the scissors motor 2226 is supported at substantially the center of the sliding body 2222, the relatively heavy scissors motor 2226 is supported at the center, so that the space between the guide member 2208 and the sliding body 2222 can be reduced. The load transmission can be made substantially uniform without any deviation regardless of the position of the sliding body 2222, and the sliding body 2222 and the guide member 2208 can be prevented from being unevenly worn by the uneven load, so that the durability of the center movable decorative body 2200 can be improved. Can be improved.

  Further, the roller 2236 supported by the slide body 2222 rolls on a pair of guide shafts 2208a as the guide member 2208, and the guide shaft 2208a is sandwiched between the roller 2236 and the slide body presser 2238. 2222 can be guided smoothly, and the sliding body 2222 can be prevented from falling off the guide shaft 2208a.

  Further, the heel portion 2202 and the heel motor 2226 can be supported by the heel support member 2224, and the heel support member 2224 is fixed between the pair of guide shafts 2208a at the center of the sliding body 2222. The load applied to the sliding body 2222 can be applied to each guide shaft 2208a substantially evenly, and the uneven load that applies a large load only to one guide shaft 2208a can be suppressed. Uneven wear of the sliding body 2222 and the guide shaft 2208a can be prevented, and the occurrence of problems in the center movable decorative body 2200 can be prevented.

  Further, when the moving drive gear 2216 having a smaller diameter than the pinion gear 2218 is rotated by the center moving motor 2214, the pinion gear 2218 meshing with the moving drive gear 2216 rotates faster than the moving drive gear 2216. It becomes possible to make the movement of the meshing rack gear 2220 faster, and the sliding body 2222, that is, the flange portion 2202 can be moved faster in the left-right direction, and the faster moving flange portion 2202 (sliding body 2222) To attract more interest and entertain the movement.

  In addition, the movement detection piece 2222c of the sliding body 2222 can be detected by the center movement detection sensor 2240, so that the movement position of the sliding body 2222 can be detected. The sliding body 2222 can be surely positioned with respect to the desired position of the player, and a desired movement that can enhance the interest of the player is surely caused to the sliding body 2222, thereby suppressing the interest of the player from being lowered. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the rotation detection piece 2228b is detected by the rotation detection sensor 2256, the rotation position of the collar portion 2202 can be detected. Therefore, immediately before the collar portion 2202 comes into contact with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can be rotated to stop, preventing the flange 2202 and the display screen from coming into contact with each other, causing a fine scratch on the display screen, or causing a strong contact with the display screen and damage. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, since the depth of the game board installation recessed part 510 can be enlarged, the back side from the panel holder 600, ie, the depth of the back unit 2000 (depth of a back box) can be enlarged. Accordingly, the movable decorative body 2006 can be reliably disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599, and a larger movable decorative body 2006, a movable decorative body 2006 having a wide movable range, and the like can be disposed. In addition to the movable performance by 2006, the movable decorative body 2006 itself can provide a game board 4 having a distinctly different appearance from the conventional planar game board. The pachinko machine 1 that can attract the interest of the player and raise the expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and suppress the interest is reduced.

  Furthermore, since the game board 4 can be increased in size, even if the display area of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 640 is widened, the movement of the game ball and the effect image are suppressed while the basin of the game ball is reduced. Can be enjoyed together, and the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be enlarged to give various movements to the flowing game balls, in addition to the movable decoration body 2006, the light emitting decoration body 2004, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which a movable accessory, a decorative body, and the like are arranged so that the player can be entertained and more interesting.

The claims that can be grasped from the above embodiment and technical ideas other than the claims will be described below together with the effects thereof.
In the first aspect of the invention, after a predetermined start condition (start winning prize) is established, a plurality of types of symbol information (special symbols (books) are established based on the establishment of the start condition (end of previous variation display, end of small hit and big hit). In the example, the display means (special symbol display (in this example, the first special symbol display 1802, the second special symbol) is displayed by executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol)) A symbol display 1804)),
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that controls to a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) that gives a predetermined profit to a player when a specific display result (specific mode) is derived and displayed on the display means,
Game control means (main control board 1350) for controlling the game state according to the progress of the game,
Effect control means (peripheral control board 2680) for controlling display of effect display means (liquid crystal display device 640) different from the display means based on a control signal output from the game control means;
An operation means (operation button 330) provided so as to be operable by the player and outputting an operation signal to the effect control means according to the operation;
The game control means includes
Display result determination means (first special symbol hit determination means 2565, second special symbol hit determination means 2575) for determining whether or not the display result is the specific display result based on the establishment of the start condition; ,
Based on the determination result of the display result determination means, a change mode (first change) including change time information from the start of the change display of the plurality of types of symbol information on the display means until the display result is derived and displayed. A variation mode determining means (first special symbol variation pattern selecting unit 2564, second special symbol variation pattern selecting unit 2574) for determining a special symbol variation pattern and a second special symbol variation pattern);
When the display unit executes the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information and the display result determination unit determines that the specific display result is the specific display result, the variation mode determined by the variation mode determination unit The non-specific display result that is different from the specific display result when the variable time has elapsed when it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable time has elapsed and is not to be the display specific display result. Display control means (first special symbol display control means 2568, second special symbol display control means 2578) for deriving and displaying (losing mode);
Control signal output means (command) for outputting a control signal indicating the variation mode determined by the variation mode determination unit to the effect control unit when the display control unit starts the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information. Transmission means 2588),
The production control means includes
Effect mode storage means (ROM 2604) for storing a plurality of types of effect modes (effect patterns) controlled to be displayed on the effect display means in synchronization with the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information executed by the display means;
Effect mode selection means (effect pattern selection means 2652) for selecting one of the plurality of types of effect modes based on the variation mode specified by the control signal input from the control signal output means;
An operation frequency determination means (operation frequency determination means 2666b) for determining an operation frequency of the operation means within a predetermined period determined in advance,
In the plurality of types of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means, as the effect modes corresponding to the same variation mode, an operation of changing the display content of the effect display means according to the operation of the operation means A normal mode (in accordance with the operation of the operation button 330) that controls the display of the requested mode (the production pattern for performing the production according to the operation of the operation button 330) and the production mode that is determined in advance regardless of the operation of the operation means. A production pattern that does not execute the production)
The production mode selection unit selects the operation request mode at a higher rate than the normal mode when the operation frequency determination unit determines that the operation frequency is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. When it is determined that the operation frequency is less than the predetermined value, the normal mode is selected at a higher rate than the operation request mode.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation frequency of the operating means is determined within a predetermined period, and when it is determined that the operation frequency is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. While selecting the operation request mode for changing the display content of the effect display means according to the operation of the operation means at a higher rate than the normal mode displaying the effect mode determined in advance regardless of the operation of the operation means, When it is determined that the operation frequency is less than the predetermined value, the normal mode is selected at a higher rate than the operation request mode, and the production is performed in synchronization with the variable display of multiple types of symbol information executed by the display means. Since the display means is display-controlled, an effect according to the operation of the operation means can be executed according to the player's preference, and an operation request mode is frequently given to a player who does not want to operate the operation means. More troublesome It is possible to avoid the dullness of the game due to give a to of. In addition, since it is possible to execute an effect that matches the preference of the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine (parrot, pachinko machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine). In this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 10 Upper frame plate (horizontal frame)
11 Lower frame plate (horizontal frame)
12 Side frame plate (vertical frame)
13 Side frame plate (vertical frame)
101 gaming window 300 dish unit 330 operation button (second operation part)
330a Operation button (left)
330b Operation button (middle)
330c Operation button (right)
381 Storage part 461 Operation handle part (first operation part)
500 Main body frame main body 510 Game board installation recess 540 First side wall (front side wall)
541 Second side wall (rear side wall)
542 Third side wall (rear side wall)
543 Fourth side wall (rear side wall)
546 Shaft support side rear wall (side rear wall)
599 game panel 599e opening (through hole)
600 Panel holder 600a Holding step portion 600b Through hole 600j Mounting hole 600k Positioning hole 601 Front component member 602 Outer rail 603 Inner rail 605 Game area 635 Panel back plate 623 Board substrate holder 624 Main base control board box 640 Liquid crystal display device (effect) Display means)
640a Fixed piece 640b Display side support portion 720 Prize ball tank (game medium tank)
740 Tank rail member 800 Prize ball unit (payout unit)
1000 Locking device 1350 Main control board 1354 First decoration control board (peripheral control board)
1358 Second decoration control board (peripheral control board)
1500 Attacker unit 1502 First start port (receiving port)
1506 Second start port (reception port)
1510 Grand Prize Entrance (Reception Entrance)
1702 General winning entrance (entrance)
1800 Symbol Display Device 1802 First Special Symbol Indicator 1804 Second Special Symbol Indicator 1806 Normal Symbol Indicator 1808 First Special Symbol Memory Number Indicator 1810 Second Special Symbol Memory Number Indicator 1812 Normal Symbol Memory Number Indicator 1814 Round Display 1816 Small hits display 2002 Back box 2004 Light emitting decorative body 2006 Movable decorative body 2010 Housing space 2012 Opening portion 2014 Back wall 2100 Decoration member 2120 LED
2122 LED
2124 LED
2200 Center movable ornament 2202 Gutter 2300 Side movable ornament 2300L Left side movable ornament 2300R Right side movable ornament 2302 Side ornament 2500 Main board 2562 First special random number generation means (game lottery means)
2564 First special symbol variation pattern selection means 2572 Second special random number generation means (game lottery means)
2574 Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2582 Advantageous game state generation means 2584 Extra prize opening opening / closing control means 2588 Command transmission means 2600 Peripheral control board 2650 Command reception means 2552 Effect pattern selection means 2654 Light emission effect control means 2656 Effect display control means 2658 Movable production control means 2659 Production control means 2660 Center movable decoration body control means 2626 Side movable decoration body control means 2664 Under movable decoration body control means 2666 Operation acceptance means 2666a Counting means 2666b Operation frequency judgment means 2668 Stroke judgment means 2670 Picture change means 2672 Strike count counting means 2673 Operation lottery means 2676 Invitation pattern table changing means 2678 Display lottery means 2680 Invitation pattern selection means 2682 Door design (specific effect pattern)
W crocodile pattern

Claims (3)

A display means for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result by executing a variable display of a plurality of types of symbol information based on establishment of the start condition after establishment of the predetermined start condition;
A gaming machine that controls a profit granting state to give a predetermined profit to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means,
Game control means for controlling the gaming state according to the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling display of effect display means different from the display means based on a control signal output from the game control means;
An operation means provided so as to be operable by the player, and outputting an operation signal to the effect control means according to the operation,
The game control means includes
Display result determination means for determining whether the display result is the specific display result based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the determination result of the display result determination unit, a plurality of types of variation patterns including variation time information from when the display unit starts varying display of the plurality of types of symbol information until the display result is derived and displayed A variation pattern determining means for determining any one of the variation patterns of
When the display unit executes the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information and the display result determination unit determines that the specific display result is obtained, the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit When it is determined that the specific display result is derived and not used as the specific display result when the variation time has elapsed, a non-specific display result that is different from the specific display result when the variation time has elapsed is displayed. Display control means for deriving and displaying;
When the display control means starts the variable display of the plurality of types of symbol information, a control signal indicating the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination means and the determination result of the display result determination means is the effect control. Control signal output means for outputting to the means,
The production control means includes
Effect pattern storage means for storing a plurality of kinds of effect patterns corresponding to each of the plurality of types of variation patterns and indicating an effect mode displayed on the effect display means;
Based on the variation pattern specified by the control signal input from the control signal output means, one of the plurality of types of effect patterns is selected, and the control signal input from the control signal output means When a specific variation pattern of a plurality of types of variation patterns is designated, the operation request pattern for changing the effect mode of the effect display means according to the operation of the operation means and the operation of the operation means are irrelevant An effect pattern selecting means for selecting any one of a normal pattern for controlling the display of the effect mode determined in advance on the effect display means,
An effect display for notifying the effect result corresponding to the determination result of the display result determining means when the effect display means is controlled to display based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selecting means and the variation time has elapsed. Control means;
When the operation request pattern is selected by the effect pattern selection means, the display result determination means starts the display control of the effect display means by the effect display control means based on the operation request pattern. The number of operations of the operation means within a predetermined period is monitored until the presentation result corresponding to the above is notified, and whether or not the number of operations of the operation means in one variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. An operation frequency determination means for determining whether or not
The production pattern selection unit selects the operation request pattern at a rate higher than the normal pattern when the operation number determination unit determines that the operation number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the operation pattern determination unit selects the operation pattern When it is determined that the number of times is less than the predetermined number, the normal pattern is selected at a higher rate than the operation request pattern. The operation request pattern is an effect pattern that can change the effect mode of the effect display means to a specific effect mode based on at least a predetermined number of operations of the operation means.
The operation number determining means determines that the operation number of the operation means is equal to or more than the predetermined number based on the operation of the operation means exceeding the half of the plurality of times. Item 1. The gaming machine according to Item 1. A game area formed on the front of the game board and into which game balls are to be shot,
Launching means for driving a game ball toward the game area according to the player's operation;
A plurality of types of winning holes arranged in the gaming area,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the starting condition is established when a game ball wins a starting opening among the plurality of types of winning opening. 4.

Images